Home

NVR 4.2.1 Installation and User Manual

1. hice aan a 0200 03 00 10400 05 00 06 00 07 00 08 00 09 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 1400 15 00 16 00 17 00 16 00 19 00 j20 00 21 00 2200 23 00 uncer Q G GH D GHG G GH H B GOH OO O in way amp CAAA AAAA G GH HGB G GH HOGH Network EEROR QO RR ROR RRO RT R I UTORO RORO GQ GDH OR ROR OR O RR O E moy AAATAOC GDH GH D G G HOHO Hybrid saucy OD Q QD GQH H G GQHH GHDH GOHHGH sny O Q GQH A GOQ G A AO Elundy O or tuesday aways Elwednesday only record on alarm Othursday Recording on with alarms OFriday E Saturday E sunday Start hour 00 00 End hour 01 00 r 3 Assign camera s to the schedule group s 124 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Scheduler Figure 11 3 Group Editor Page American Dynamics 4 2 0 688 A Tyco International Company Group Editor Live Video Select a schedule group from dropdown default Cameras List Alarms gt Scheduler All other cameras This group Passwords E Name IP Address Name IP Address Discovery F Camera 1 192 168 188 168 Camera_2 0 1 1 100 Storage f T axis camera_3 0 1 1 100 System 00408c7f4ce7 i 192 168 100 66 o Camera_4 0 1 1 100 Network f
2. 2 00 0c eee 143 Edit the SSA Message 00 e ect tee ee teens 143 Edit SSA ContactS 2cc504e eieid ae veda Pi ae vee de dd ee ha ee ee 144 Set the SMTP Server Address 00 00 cece eee eee eee 145 Send an SSA Test Message 0 000 eee 145 5 American Dynamics ix Table of Contents Network Settings OVERVIEW honed aia hotel gta oe A ee eel ha Oe a hale gla ek oes 2 ar eA 147 Configuring the NVR Network Settings 0 c eee eee 147 General Network SettingS 0 0 0 0 cee eee eae 149 Domain Name and Domain Name Servers 000 eee eee eee 149 Default Gateway cerana ssaka eE eee ees 150 RTSP Polit 0 i609 nice snad Gaddteia thd dee had date dad a aa 150 NTP Status and NTP Servers 0 0 0 c ete tee eae 151 LAN Interface Settings 0 00 0c ee ees 152 DHCP Server Settings 2 2 2 c cee 155 WAN Settings i006 ca been Yl eels dele devas ota Ye daa ee 157 WAN IP Address ootas gg ge xe tchete Sens aradee tiaraa abd ged oe Ree Behe eg mat eo 159 HIT Pome t 22 dan bet ieidiabed beaded adda eteliciatabiidteias 159 secure HTTP FOM ordea sete cevaa tied gy eee ee ABE ee eh ea 160 Streaming Configured Port 0 000 cee eae 161 Allowed IP Addresses 0 5000 e eee ete eee ene 161 Dynamic Bandwidth 0 0 stur Ta EEAO eee eae 162 Bandwidth Priority 20 00 cee teens 163 Traffic Smoothing Only 0 0 0 cee 164 Preserve Framerate 2 0 5 0 ph
3. Recording Always The camera will record continuously In this mode you will not receive alert notifications from the NVR Recording Normal O Camera is not recording an Off Alarm On alarm is detected recording commences Using this mode you will receive alert notifications from the NVR Recording Always Camera is recording with Alarm On continuously with alarm detection bump on alarm Using this mode you will receive alert notifications from the NVR Procedure 8 7 Setting the Camera Recording Status Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu Select List Click Setup in the camera record for which you want to configure camera settings The Function amp Streams page opens 4 Select the required Record Status option button Table 8 1 Recording Statuses e Recording Off e Recording Always e Recording Normal Off Alarms On e Recording Always with Alarm On 5 Click Apply Note You can check the recording mode of any camera in the Live Video windows The recording mode is displayed beside the camera name End 5 American Dynamics 95 Camera Configuration 96 Set a Camera Recording Retention Period The recording retention period is the maximum duration over which video recorded for a camera will be saved for without being deleted Recorded video older than this will be deleted periodically to free storage space in the storage set the camera
4. The amount of detected object that must be in the region of interest when it first appears in the camera view The object must leave the region of interest by the same amount before an alarm is triggered For best results select a higher overlap setting Click Save End Editing a Video Intelligence Camera Alarm You can make changes to Video Intelligence camera alarm rules if required for example you can change the region of interest and update the parameters associated with that rule s Video Intelligence alarm type 120 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Video Intelligence Procedure 10 4 Editing a Motion Detection Camera Alarm Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Alarms The Camera Alarm Configuration page opens Figure 10 2 3 Select Edit for the camera alarm you want to edit NAME Activity in Window Area Ext Office Area Exit Object Removed Abandoned Removed Yes 4 Use the drawing tools to edit the selected alarm s region of interest in the Camera Alarm Configuration drawing window refer to Table 9 2 Drawing Tools on page 107 for information on how to use the drawing tools 5 Edit the alarm s parameters These will be different for each type of Video Intelligence alarm Note You cannot update the Name of the alarm If you must change the alarm name you must create a new alarm with the new name assign it the same para
5. Optional Click the License Translations button to view the license in a different language 4 After reading the licence agreement select the Agree to the License Terms checkbox Figure 26 8 Welcome Page Welcome YaST 9 Welcome Choose the Language and the Keyboard layout to be used during installation and for the installed system more Installation y Language gt Welcome English US Time Zone Disk e Installation Settings Keyboard Layout e Perform Installation English US Configuration e Automatic Configuration License Agreement License Agreement c Copyright 2011 Sensormatic Electronics LLC All rights r 5 reserved Administrative Password e Optional User Use of the software is subject to the following End User License End User License Agreement EULA IMPORTANT READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA CAREFULLY BEFORE OPENING THE DISK PACKAGE DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE OR INSTALLING COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE THIS EULA IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND SENSORMATIC ELECTRONICS LLC TYCO WHICH SOFTWARE INCLUDES COMPUTER SOFTWARE O Agree to the License Terms License Translations aor Next 5 Click Next The Clock and Time Zone page opens Select the Region from the dropdown Select the Time Zone from the dropdown The date and time for the selected time zone is displayed Note If the time and date settin
6. E e St Click Custom Level Scroll down the Settings list to Download unsigned ActiveX Controls and select Enable Figure 23 6 Custom Security Settings y Security Settings Internet Zone Settings Disable Enable 18 Download signed ActiveX controls Disable gt Enable not secure Prompt recommended Download unsigned ActiveX controls not secure Disable recommended Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe for s Disable recommended Enable not secure Prompt Only allow approved domains to use ActiveX without prompt M niesha m m r Takes effect after you restart Internet Explorer Reset custom settings Reset to Medium default 7 Click OK End Ay American Dynamics 243 Appendix B Web Client Pre configuration 244 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Overview If your client PC is unable to connect with the NVR you will need to troubleshoot your difficulties This Appendix covers two common network problems 1 Your client PC has not been assigned an IP address or addresses Without an address your NVR cannot communicate with the client 2 Your client PC has an IP address but cannot reach the NVR There are some basic tools for checking network connectivity ipconfig all ping and tracert This appendix can help you learn mor
7. Security and Users 3 Click Remote Administration RDP Refer to Figure 25 3 Control Center The Remote Administration window opens Figure 25 2 Remote Administration Remote Administration YaST Remote Administration If this feature is enabled you can administer this machine remotely from another machine more Remote Administration Settings Allow Remote Administration Do Not Allow Remote Administration Firewall Settings Firewall is disabled aort Back Finish 4 Select Allow Remote Administration Refer to Figure 25 4 Remote Administration 5 Click Finish End 262 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Enabling VNC Remote Desktop Virtual Network Computing VNC settings can be enabled which will allow you to access the NVR s desktop from a remote PC using your web browser and Java VNC is platform independent so more than one user can access the NVR s desktop at once Note Connection is usually through port 5801 Procedure 25 2 Enabling and Disabling Remote Desktop Settings Step Action 1 Click Computer 2 Select YaST The Control Center opens Figure 25 3 Control Center YaST2 Control Center Network Services Filter fk DHCP Server DNS Server Groups T Hostnames Hardware Miscellaneous l iSCSI Initiator ch iSCSI Target Network Devices Network Services FA Kerberos Client D LDAP Brow
8. Select deselect the Retrieve Camera Logs check box as required Select deselect the Retrieve Recording Pipeline Description checkbox as required Select deselect the Retrieve Camera Firmware details checkbox as required Using the Maximum Camera Log Size dropdown select the maximum camera log size Select deselect the Include Core Files checkbox as required Click Get Logs Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Logs 11 When the File Download window displays Click Open or Save The Logs folder is now ready to be viewed End FTP Log Management The FTP Log Management page allows you to configure FTP server settings where system logs will be uploaded periodically The Event Log is rotated all entries are cleared when it is full To preserve the Events Log this function should be configured and enabled Note Only syslog files are uploaded when using this feature The FTP Log Management page allows you to input the FTP server IP Address FTP Username remote FTP Directory and FTP Password A valid Default Gateway must be assigned in the General Network Settings to use this feature Figure 19 2 FTP Log Management Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company r Log Management Live Video f TREA This page configures an FTP server where system logs will be uploaded periodically Please specify FTP server IP remote FTP directory valid FTP login password and click enable check box to start uploading
9. 5 American Dynamics 229 Appendix A Storage 230 19 20 21 22 Click Next The Expert Partitioner Summary displays a list of the changes that will be made to the NVR partitions Click Finish The Perform Installation page opens and the disk partition for the new storage device is created Configure the NVR to allow the new disk to be used for storage a Open a web browser b Enter the IP address of the NVR into the URL field The NVR login dialog box opens c Enter the Administrators User name and Password User name admin Default Password VIDEO edge23 d Select Storage from the main menu e Select Basic The Basic Storage Configuration page opens f Locate the new storage device in the summary table and select the checkbox in the storage device record g Click Add to Storage The connection and configuration of a fibre storage device is complete The fibre device can now be used to store media from the NVR End Connecting NVR to FRS FES Using iSCSI Before configuring external storage you must stop NVR Services Refer to Procedure 16 2 Stop NVR Services on page 170 Once you have connected and configured external storage devices you must restart the NVR Services Refer to Procedure 16 1 Restart NVR Services on page 170 Procedure 22 3 Connecting NVR to FRS FES Using iSCSI Step Action 1 Power OFF the NVR and install the iSCSI NIC Card LAN3 into correct and compatible slot 2 Conn
10. 80 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera List Procedure 7 4 Manually Adding an IP Camera or Encoder Step Action Select the Cameras menu 2 Select List The Camera List opens Figure 7 1 3 Click Add New Camera Figure 7 2 Add New Camera Window Camera Name Internal IP Address Password Group 0 default Storage Set 1 Apply Cancel 4 Enter the Camera Name Enter the Internal IP Address of the camera Select the Password Group of the camera from the dropdown list Note The Password Group will usually be default The NVR will use the manufacturer s default password to connect to the camera However if you have changed the password for this camera you need to assign the camera to the appropriate password group or create a new password group For further information on password groups refer to Camera Password Groups on page 131 7 Optional Select the Storage Set from the dropdown list Note 1 This option is only available if you are using advanced storage configuration The Storage Set dropdown list displays all storage sets with at least one storage media folder assigned The selected storage set is where the camera will record to 2 Ifyou are using basic storage configuration the camera will automatically be assigned to the default storage set 8 Click Apply The camera is added to the Camera List 5 American Dynamics 81 Camera List 9 Configure the camera settings as r
11. Camera Details Aug 07 2012 10 27 26 Scheduler status New Status Disabled Aug 21 2012 12 08 19 Start MD request Name P 2 stretch_2 127 0 0 1 Start M D Based Recording A Tyco Intemational Company Table 19 1 Camera Logs Definitions Column Description Date Time Displays the Date and Time that the camera reported a change Category Lists the type of action or change that occurred Camera Lists the camera number name and IP Address Details Displays the details of the action or change that occurred Operator Displays the name of the user who initiated the action Client Machine Lists ue la Address of the client machine from which the user initiated action originated Procedure 19 5 Viewing the Camera Logs Step Action Select Advanced Select Logs Select the Camera Logs tab The Camera Logs page opens End 5 American Dynamics 205 Logs Audit Trail The Audit Trail page displays a log of system changes which have been made by a privileged user The system changes which are logged in the Audit Trail are a Fk O N System Date and Time Software upgrade FTP Log Management settings User Login Passwords Network Settings Figure 19 7 Audit Trail Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Live Video Cameras Storage System Network Advanced Failover St
12. Changing the Main Administrator s Password The main administrator account has complete access to the NVR interface and all its functions and it cannot be deleted The main administrator ID is always admin and cannot be changed whereas the main administrator s password can be and should be changed When a NVR is installed for the first time or when the NVR has been restored to factory default settings the administrator s default credentials are ID admin Password VIDEO edge23 As this is the default password supplied with all NVRs there are security risks if you do not change the password to a private password known only to the administrator and those to whom the administrator is responsible It is recommended that you change the main administrators password during installation Changing the Operator s Password The operator account has access to view video and settings on the NVR interface but not to edit them it can also not be deleted It also is unable to view logs which have been generated by the NVR The operator ID is always operator and cannot be changed whereas its password can be and again like the admin account should be changed When the NVR is first installed the default credentials are as follows ID operator Password VideoEdge 5 American Dynamics 31 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Figure 3 13 Roles Page LAN WAN Bandwidth Throttling DHCP Cameras Discovery Configure
13. Cipboara Send errat Der Retresh VIDEOQEDGE m cometer PR aa 1 52 Pm a Computer Button Main Pane This area Workspace Tabs Launches the start menu forms the main body of the Allows you to have up to OS interface Menus and four menus operations files will open in this area open at any one time Procedure 25 6 Logging Off VNC Remote Desktop Step Action 1 Click the Disconnect command button VNC Remote Desktop is disconnected End A American Dynamics 269 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Editing the Network Settings Using Control Center You can edit the NVR s network settings using the Control Center tool within the NVR desktop Note To make changes to the NVR system using the Control Center you must ensure you are logged in as the Root user Procedure 25 7 Editing the NVR s Network Settings Using Control Center Step Action 1 Log in to the NVR desktop locally or using a remote desktop connection refer to Procedure 25 5 Logging in to VNC Remote Desktop on page 268 2 Click Computer Select YaST The Control Center opens 4 Click Network Settings Refer to The Network Settings window opens 270 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Figure 25 11 Network Settings Icon La Network Settings Network Settings YaST sy Network Settings Obtain an overview of installed network cards more Global Options Overview Hostname DNS
14. MEDIA FOLDER DEVICE STATUS NON MEDIA USED SPACE GB RECORDED MEDIA USED SPACE GB PROTECTED MEDIA USED SPACE GB ALLOTTED MEDIA SPACE GB AVAILABLE SPACE GB Table 18 4 Storage Device Statistics Field Description Media Folder Name of the media folder used by storage Device Associated device on which this media folder is located Storage Set Storage set this media folder is assigned to Status Current Status of this folder Normal Degraded and so on Total Size GB Total size of this device Non Media Used Space GB Total amount of space used by non NVR media files if any on this device Recorded Media Used Space Total amount of space used for NVR recorded GB media at this time Protected Media Used Space Total amount of space used for protected GB media on this device Allotted Media Space GB Configured amount to use for storage on this device Available Space GB Current total available unused space on this device Storage Statistics per Camera The Cameras page details the storage statistics for each camera These are outlined in Table 18 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Operational Statistics Figure 18 6 Storage Statistics per Camera Cameras Storage Statistics Per Camera RECORDED VIDEO TOTAL RECORDED PROTECTED RECORD RATE Kbps CAMERA
15. and gt gt arrows to move cameras between the All other Cameras list and the This group list until the cameras you want to be assigned to the selected recording group are in the This group list 6 Click Save End Remove a Schedule Group 128 You can remove unwanted schedule groups when they are no longer needed Note If you remove a schedule the cameras in this schedule will be assigned back to the default scheduler group Procedure 11 6 Removing a Schedule Group Step Action 1 Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Scheduler The Schedules page opens Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Scheduler 3 Select the checkbox in the group record s that you want to delete 4 Select Remove Group s The group is removed from the Schedule groups table End 5 American Dynamics 129 Camera Scheduler 130 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Password Groups Overview When an IP camera is added to a NVR the server uses the manufacturer s default username and password to communicate with the camera Administrators can change the default security information however when this is changed the NVR can no longer communicate with the camera using the default settings If you change the password for a camera or a number of cameras usually through direct web interfaces you need to create a Password Group for those cameras and assign it th
16. A American Dynamics Installation and User Manual VideoEdge NVR Version 4 2 1 Part Number 8200 0959 01 BO VideoEdge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Notice The information in this manual was current when published The manufacturer reserves the right to revise and improve its products All specifications are therefore subject to change without notice Copyright Under copyright laws the contents of this manual may not be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Tyco International Ltd 2011 and its Respective Companies All Rights Reserved American Dynamics 6600 Congress Avenue Boca Raton FL 33487 U S A Customer Service Thank you for using American Dynamics products We support our products through an extensive worldwide network of dealers The dealer through whom you originally purchased this product is your point of contact if you need service or support Our dealers are empowered to provide the very best in customer service and support Dealers should contact American Dynamics at 800 507 6268 or 561 912 6259 or on the Web at www americandynamics net Trademarks Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation PS 2 is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation The trademarks logos and service marks displayed on this document are registered in th
17. Camera_5 0 1 1 100 Advanced 7 Camera_6 0 1 1 100 Hybrid A Tyco International Company Procedure 11 1 Creating a Recording Schedule Step Action 1 Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Scheduler The Schedules page opens 3 Create a new schedule group a Enter a schedule name into the Schedule Name field b Click Create Schedule The new group is added to the schedule groups table 4 Select Edit Group Times O in the schedule group record you want to configure The Schedule Editor page opens Figure 11 2 5 Select the checkbox es representing the day s for which you want to set the recording times and the recording mode 6 Select the Recording Mode option button you can select e Off e Always e Only record on alarm e Recording on with alarms For further information on recording modes refer to Recording Statuses on page 95 7 Select the times between which you want the selected recording mode to be active a Select the Start hour from the dropdown b Select the End hour from the dropdown 5 American Dynamics 125 Camera Scheduler 10 11 12 13 Click Apply The Schedule Times chart updates with the selected day s recording mode and times Note If you click Apply All Week the selected recording mode will be applied to every hour of every day of the week It will not apply the recording mode and selected start and end times to every day of the week To set other recordi
18. OLDEST VIDEO NEWEST VIDEO HOURS 2012 07 27712 56 45Z 2012 08 21T11 47 16Z MEDIA GB MEDIA GB LAST 24 HOURS 2012 07 27712 56 45Z 2012 08 21711 47 17Z 2012 07 27712 56 45Z 2012 08 21711 47 17Z 2012 07 27712 56 45Z 2012 08 21711 47 14Z 2012 07 30T12 14 06Z 2012 08 21T11 47 16Z 2012 07 30T12 14 20Z 2012 07 31T16 06 04Z 2012 07 30T12 14 35Z 2012 07 31T16 06 05Z 2012 07 30712 14 52Z 2012 07 31T16 06 07Z 2012 07 30T12 15 37Z 2012 07 31T16 06 08Z 2012 07 30T12 15 56Z 2012 07 31T16 06 09Z 2012 07 30T12 16 15Z 2012 07 31T16 06 08Z 2012 07 30T12 16 36Z 2012 07 31T16 06 07Z Table 18 5 Camera Storage Statistics Field Description Camera Input number Oldest Video Time of oldest video for this camera across all storage sets Newest Video Time of newest video for this camera across all storage sets Recorded Video Hours Total number of recorded video hours for this camera across all storage sets Total Recorded Media GB Total amount of recorded media for this camera across all storage sets Protected Media GB Total amount of protected media for this camera across all storage sets Record Rate Kbps Last 24 Hours Record rate for this camera over the last 24 hours N A if less than 24 hours of data Procedure 18 4 Viewing Storage Statistics Step Action Select Advanced from the
19. Storage Upload Disabled Edit System i FTP Server Network FIP User FTP Directory Advanced FTP Password Failover Storage Statistics Logs Dark Image Detection Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Monitor Output Presets Monitor Output Tours Hybrid A Tyco intem Procedure 19 2 Editing Settings for the Log FTP Server Step Action 1 Select Advanced 2 Select Logs 5 American Dynamics 201 Logs O DAN Oa Ff Select the FTP Log Management tab The FTP Log Management page opens Select Edit Select the Enabled option button to enable Event Log upload to the FTP Server Enter the IP Address in the FTP Server field Enter the username in the FTP User field Enter the directory in the FTP Directory field Enter the password in the FTP Password field Enter the password again in the Confirm Password field Click Save Note When FTP Log upload is enabled a Test Upload button displays This button can be used to verify the FTP server settings A successful upload test will create a test file on the specified location of the FTP Server Figure 19 3 Test Upload Button FTP Log Management This page configures an FTP server where system logs will be uploaded periodically Please specify FTP server IP remote ftp directory valid ftp login password and tick enable check box to start uploading Upload Enabled Ftp
20. The Live Installer launches Figure 26 7 Live Installer Terminal File Edit View Terminal Help Filesystem label OS type Linux Block size 4096 Log 2 Fragment size 4096 log 2 62848 inodes 251007 blocks 12550 blocks 5 00 reserved for the super user First data block 0 Maximum filesystem blocks 260046848 8 block groups 32768 blocks per group 32768 fragments per group 7856 inodes per group Superblock backups stored on blocks 32768 98304 163840 229376 Writing inode tables done Creating journal 4096 blocks done Writing superblocks and filesystem accounting information done This filesystem will be automatically checked every 32 mounts or 180 days whichever comes first Use tune2fs c or i to override umount mnt tmpl not mounted Launching VideoEdge NVMS installer Please wait The YaST Installation wizard launches End Using the YaST Wizard During the second stage of the upgrade process the YaST wizard launches The YaST wizard is used to configure your NVR s settings including language keyboard layout date and time and partitioning Once the YaST wizard is complete the final stage of the upgrade process is initialized reopening the upgrade tool 284 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Procedure 26 5 Using the YaST Wizard Step Action 1 Select the required Language from the dropdown Select the Keyboard Layout from the dropdown
21. You will not be presented with Linux system file systems for example proc sys etc Note When allocating media folders from the same device or RAID group it is recommended to associate them with the same storage set Hard drive thrashing can occur if media folders from the same hard drive are spread across several storage sets this could result in the systems performance being downgraded when the hard drive is being overworked When a media folder is moved to another storage set all previously recorded media will still be retrievable via clip export and playback in victor unified client Procedure 5 6 Assigning Reassigning Media Folders to a Storage Set Step Action Select Storage from the main menu 2 Select Advanced The Advanced Storage Configuration page opens Figure 5 2 3 Locate the media folder in its existing storage set that you want to move to a new storage set 4 Select the new storage set you want to assign the media folder to from the Move to Storage Set dropdown list The media folder is reassigned to the new storage set End Assigning Cameras to Storage Sets During the process of adding cameras to the NVR if only the default storage set is available the new camera will be added to this storage set However if there are a number of storage sets available you will be prompted to assign the camera to the required storage set Cameras can be reassigned to different storage sets as required without n
22. All Command Step Action 1 Open a Windows Command Prompt Refer to Procedure 24 3 Launch Windows Command Prompt Windows XP Or Procedure 24 4 Launch the Windows Command Prompt Windows 7 2 Type ipconfig all in the Command Prompt window followed by the Enter key The configuration settings for all of your connections will display Figure 24 14 Figure 24 14 IPCONFIG ALL Command IC gt ipconfig all Windows IP Confi g WINS Proxy DNS Suffix Search Li NetBIOS over Tepip Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection specific DNS Suffix corpdomain ne DHGPus Duin DNS Seru NetBIOS over Tepip Tunnel adapter isatap corpdomain net ecific DNS Suffix corpdomain net NetBIOS over Tcpip Tunnel adapter ap lt A1B8 ic gt Gigabit USB 2 Network Ad D 1B B6 Yes 80 806f 1117 a7d5 e8bex13 lt Preferred gt 32 168 188 30 lt Preferred 255 255 255 ago2e78 9 G1 8 1 16 C4 A6 57 GG6 1E 4F 97 1F 8B FF FF i Fneeiens 82866DM 2 Gigabit Network Connec 00 iE 4F 97 iF 8P Microsoft ISATAP Adapter ee 66 88 88 60 80 EBBC 491A BC 8 CCF967208996 gt Media cted Adapter 2 Bo po 80 00 Ob bo Ba Ee 3 Verify the IP address es assigned tot he Client PC s Local Area Connection are correct matches what you assigned if you have assigned a static IP address 4 If any of the Default Gateway DHCP Server or DNS Server addresses are 0 0 0 0 it is lik
23. Also displays user This is the main method of navigation account in use and software version STREAM 1 NAME Alarms Live Alarm Scheduler American Dynamics Vid 127 0 0 1 Passwords stretch_1 MJPEG Discovery I n American Dynamics Vid 127 0 0 1 Not configured acini stretch_2 System American Dynamics Vid 127 0 0 1 Not configured stretch_3 Network American Dynamics Vid Aii 127 0 0 1 Not configured stretch_4 Hybrid American Dynamics Vid 127 0 0 1 Not configured stretch _5 American Dynamics Vid 127 0 0 1 Not configured stretch_6 Sub Menus Sub menu Live Video Menu item to Main Pane This area forms the options are displayed access live video This option main body of the web interface In when a selection is made is not available in the victor this area you can view live video and in the main menu NVR Configuration Interface change your NVR configuration settings Navigating the NVR Interface To navigate the NVR Interface and access the required configuration settings use the menu and sub menus down the left of the page The menu is divided into several main areas e Live Video web interface only e Cameras Storage e System e Network e Advanced Each menu is further divided into sub menus for easy navigation to the required configuration settings 54 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Using t
24. CAREFULLY BEFORE OPENING THE DISK PACKAGE DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE OR INSTALLING COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE THIS EULA IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND SENSORMATIC ELECTRONICS LLC TYCO WHICH SOFTWARE INCLUDES COMPUTER SOFTWARE AND MAY INCLUDE MEDIA PRINTED MATERIALS AND ON LINE OR ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION COLLECTIVELY THE SOFTWARE BY BREAKING THE SEAL ON THIS PACKAGE DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE OR INSTALLING COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA DO NOT OPEN DOWNLOAD INSTALL COPY OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE 1 SCOPE OF LICENSE The Software may include computer code program files and any associated media hardware or software keys printed material and electronic documentation The Software may be provided to you pre installed on a storage device the media as part of a computer system or other hardware or device System The Software is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties All title and intellectual property rights in and to the Software including but not limited to any images photographs and text incorporated into the Software the accompanying printed materials and any copies of the Software are owned by Tyco and or its suppliers The Software is licensed not sold All rights not express
25. Camera List Viewing the Camera List By viewing the camera list you can view a snapshot of all camera s and their basic settings that are available on the NVR Procedure 7 1 Viewing the Camera List Step Action Select the Cameras menu 2 Select List The Camera List opens Figure 7 1 displaying a table of all cameras currently connected to the NVR End Sorting the Camera List The Camera List can be sorted alphanumerically by a selected column in ascending or descending order Procedure 7 2 Sorting the Camera List Step Action Select the Cameras menu 2 Select List The Camera List opens Figure 7 1 3 Select the column header from the Camera List table that you want to sort by The list is sorted in alphanumeric order 4 Sort in ascending or descending order a Select EJ to sort in ascending order b Select v to sort in descending order End Filtering the Camera List The Camera List has a Filter feature which can be used to display specific camera records The filter feature will look at the criteria entered and compare this against all fields in the camera list 5 American Dynamics 79 Camera List For example if you enter criteria that matches characters in a camera name all cameras will be displayed that match the given filter criteria in their name This feature can be useful when looking for a particular camera in a large list of cameras Procedure 7 3 Filtering the Camera List
26. Home or work private networks Not Connected ial x Public networks Connected Networks in public places such as airports or coffee shops Windows Firewall state off Incoming connections Block all connections to programs that are not on the list of allowed programs See alse Active public networks FF Unidentified network Action Center Notification state Notify me when Windows Firewall blocks a new Network and Sharing Center program 3 Navigate to Start gt Control Panel gt Network and Internet gt Internet Options 4 Select the Security tab and deselect the Enable Protected Mode check box Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix B Web Client Pre configuration Figure 23 5 Internet Properties Security Settings Internet Properties General Security Privacy Content Connections Tome Select a zone to view or change security settings amp y O Internet Localintranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone is for Internet websites except those listed in trusted and restricted zones Security level for this zone Allowed levels for this zone Medium to High Medium high Appropriate for most websites Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded eures restoring tii Customlevel Defaultleve Reset all zones to defaultlevel
27. NVR Troubleshooting on page 261 End Procedure 15 8 Editing the LAN Interface Values Step Action 1 Select Network 2 Select LAN Interface The LAN Interface page opens 154 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Network Settings 3 Select the dropdown arrow next to the LAN Interface you wish to edit 4 Select Edit 5 To edit the LAN IP Address enter the desired IP Address in the field 6 To edit the Subnet Mask enter the desired Subnet Mask in the field 7 To edit the IP Broadcast Address enter the desired Broadcast Address in the field 8 Click Save Note The displayed MAC Address cannot be edited End DHCP Server Settings The DHCP Server page provides the option to configure the NVR to host a DHCP Server for each network card plugged into the system This allows the NVR to allocate IP addresses from the range specified when other devices request IP allocation The page allows you to edit the DHCP Status and the Start and End Range of IP Addresses to be included during automatic searching for IP Devices The DHCP Status page allows you to view all active devices which have been assigned an IP address by the NVR acting as a DHCP server The page displays the IP addresses in use by the device its MAC address when it was last active and the device s hostname caution You should only set up the NVR as a DHCP Server if you are positive the LAN does not already have a DHCP Server and the NV
28. Return to Home Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List Click Setup in the PTZ camera record for which you want to enable the Return to Home feature The Function amp Streams page opens 4 Select PTZ tab Select the Enable PTZ checkbox Note PTZ must be enabled to configure Return to Home settings 6 Select the Enable Return to Home checkbox The Return to Home After dropdown displays 7 Select the desired period of inactivity before the camera returns to home from the Return to Home After dropdown list range 60 600 seconds 8 Click Apply End 5 American Dynamics 101 Camera Configuration 102 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Motion Detection Overview The NVR provides server based motion detection for all cameras Hardware based camera based Motion Detection is not supported by the NVR The NVR supports two motion detection features e Motion Search a victor client can search recorded video for motion e Motion Alerts you can define Motion detection settings that can be used to set up motion detection rules The Motion Detection settings allow you to define the parameters which will initiate an alarm This will reduce the number of unwanted alarm events and is achieved using the following tools e Duration settings allowing you to define the time period of activity in the region of interest to activate an alarm e Direction settings allo
29. Select Alerts tab Select the Alert Pre Buffer from the dropdown list range 30 300 seconds Select the Alert Post Buffer from the dropdown list range 30 300 seconds Click Apply NO oO f End Configuring Sensors Dry Contact Sensors You can associate dry contact sensors with a particular camera in the Alerts section These are sensors typically used in doorways and are activated for example when a door is opened the NVRs can command cameras to pan tilt zoom to predetermined locations and record video for a specified period Procedure 8 12 Enabling a Dry Contact Sensor Step Action 1 Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List Select Setup for the camera for which you want to enable dry contact settings The Function amp Streams page opens 4 Select Alerts tab Select the Dry Contact Input Enabled checkbox es in the Dry Contacts section Enabled 6 Click Apply Note If you are editing the dry contact settings for a camera forming part of an encoder device all cameras related to this device will be updated with the changes made to the dry contacts In this instance a warning message opens informing you that multiple cameras will be updated End 5 American Dynamics 99 Camera Configuration Configuring PTZ Settings If a camera has PTZ capabilities you will be able enable disable PTZ functionality and configure the Return to Home settings for the camera otherwise a message stating
30. Sending an SSA Test Message Step Action Select System from the main menu 2 Select Licensing The Licensing page opens Figure 14 1 3 Click Send Test Message in the Software Service Agreement section A test message is sent to the mailbox of those on the contacts list 5 American Dynamics 145 146 Licensing the NVR A message opens to confirm if the email has been sent or if it has failed Click OK Note If the message has failed to send check your contact s email address es and the SMTP server address to confirm they are correct and re send End Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Network Settings Overview This chapter describes the functionality of the NVR Network Menu and its contained sub menus The Network Menu provides access to the NVR s network settings this allows you to edit details such as the general network settings LAN interface settings DHCP settings WAN settings and Dynamic Bandwidth Configuring the NVR Network Settings The design provides the user an extra layer of security for the cameras and reduces the network traffic on the LAN backbone It also helps prevent accidental or unauthorized changes to the configuration The example illustrated in Figure 15 1 is only one possible configuration as the NVR can be set up in a number of configurations to meet your bespoke requirements A American Dynamics 147 Network Settings Figure 15 1 Network Diagram Example Ca
31. Step Action 1 Select the Cameras menu 2 Select List The Camera List opens Figure 7 1 3 Enter the filter criteria into the Filter field The Camera List table filters displaying only cameras that meet the criteria entered Note The Camera List will filter as you type the criteria into the Filter field As the criteria gets more specific the list filters correspondingly End Manually Adding an IP Camera or Encoder The procedure for manually adding an IP camera or encoder to the NVR is generally consistent across different camera types Note The easiest method of adding cameras to the NVR is by using the Camera Auto Discovery feature However you can also manually add cameras if required For further information about Camera Auto Discovery see Adding Cameras Using Auto Discovery on page 82 When a camera is manually added to the NVR the default recording mode is set to Recording Always If the configuration of the camera does not support Motion Detection using either a primary or secondary stream then the default recording mode will be Record Always When you add an encoder to the NVR all cameras associated with this encoder will have the same IP address As a result these cameras must be assigned to the same password group and have the same dry contact settings If you edit either the password group or the dry contact settings for one camera associated with the encoder these settings will be updated for all cameras
32. Unused Devices amp Installation Summary eN Settings 5S Log F Enc Type Linux swap Swa P P Ly Linux native XFS FS Type Label Mount Point Mount By Start End Used 4 Select the first media drive from the system view tree Note swap Nar Q Linux native Ext3 ID 0 2102 ID 2102 8674 ID 8674 9725 a D Add rede B move Resize Delete bort Finish Disks may have existing partitions If this is the case they should be removed before reconfiguring a storage device by adding partitions Removing any storage partitions will destroy any existing data Click Add Select Primary Partition 7 Select Custom Size and enter 100GB to allocate to the partition Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Select Next Click the Format partition option button Select XFS from the File System dropdown Enter the Mount Point for the media partition Enter var opt americandynamics venvr clipexport Select the Fstab Options button Enter rw noatime nodiratime attr2 nobarrier noquota allocsize 4m in the Arbitrary option value field Note nobarrier should only be used on storage devices connected to disk controllers with battery backed cache Click OK Click Add Select Primary Partition Select the Maximum Size option to use the remaining disk space Select Next Click the
33. a Leave the User s Full Name Username Password and Confirm Password fields empty b Click Next A message opens stating Empty User Login and asking for confirmation to Leave it empty c Click Yes Note It is highly recommended to setup an operator account when prompted in addition to the root user account The root user account should be used for troubleshooting and system OS setup only 6 To continue with the installation and configuration process you need to log in to the NVR desktop End 5 American Dynamics 9 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Logging into the NVR Desktop After setting the root password and creation of the administration user you are required to login to the NVR desktop to continue the installation and configuration process Figure 3 1 NVR Login Screen e SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 x86_64 techcomms adnvr Username Disconnect cancel Log In Procedure 3 3 Logging into the NVR Desktop Step Action When the system boots to the NVR login screen Enter the Administrator Username Click Log In Enter the Administrator Password Click Log In On successful login the NVR desktop is displayed kh OO N End To complete the installation and configuration process you need to complete the Setup Wizard continue to VideoEdge Setup Wizard on page 25 Installing the NVR Software Only Bundle This section details the installation and co
34. any upgrades and this EULA iii if you do not retain any copies of any portion of the Software iv if the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA and v if the Software is an upgrade such transfer must also include all prior versions of the Software You agree that failure to meet all of these conditions renders such transfer null and void Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual End User License Agreement EULA d Termination Without prejudice to any other rights Tyco may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions herein In such event you must immediately destroy all copies of the Software and all of its component parts To the extent the Software is embedded in hardware or firmware you will provide prompt access to Tyco or its representative to remove or lock Software features or functionality as Tyco determines e Subsequent EULA Tyco may also supersede this EULA with a subsequent EULA pursuant to providing you with any future component release upgrade or other modification or addition to the Software Similarly to the extent that the terms of this EULA conflict with any prior EULA or other agreement between you and Tyco regarding the Software the terms of this EULA shall prevail f Incorporation of Open Source and other Third Party Software Portions of the Software may be subject to certain thirty party license agreements governing the use copying modification redistributio
35. device errors or the device being unmounted by a user A media folder could become read only for example if the device has been unmounted and remounted as read only If a media folder is determined as non operational recording will switch to the next available operational media folder in the storage set Non operational media folders are highlighted as being unhealthy To determine the health status of storage devices view the Status in the Device section of the Storage Statistics page 5 American Dynamics 71 Configuring Storage 72 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Live Video Overview Once the NVR system has been configured you can view live video streams Note If you are accessing the NVR using the victor client NVR configuration page you can not view live video Use the Surveillance tab in your victor client Viewing Live Video The camera views on an NVR can display live video up to a maximum of 4 live video streams A live audio stream is not available on the NVR Configuration interface To listen to audio use victor unified client Viewing Live Video on the NVR Web Interface uses Apple QuickTime you must have the QuickTime player installed to be able to view video This allows you to view video within the web interface and as stand alone QuickTime windows You can download it from www apple com quicktime If you try to view Live Video and do not have QuickTime installed you will be notified that
36. includes the recipient email address alert type and information sent with the time and date the alert occurred Figure 20 4 Alert Logs Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Alert Logs Live Video Cameras Clear Logs Storage System Network Advanced Failover Storage Statistics Logs Dark Image Detection gt Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Monitor Output Tours Monitor Output Presets Hybrid A Tyco Intemational Company Procedure 20 8 Displaying the Email Alerts Log Step Action 1 Select Advanced 2 Select Email Alerts 3 Select the Alert Logs tab 5 American Dynamics 215 Email Alerts The Alert Logs page opens End Clearing the Alert Logs Page All email alerts can be cleared from the Alert Logs page Procedure 20 9 Clearing the Alert Logs Page Step Action 1 Select Advanced 2 Select Email Alerts Select the Alert Logs tab The Alert Logs page opens 4 Click Clear Logs End 216 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Dark Image Detection Overview The NVR can perform a Dark Image Detection test on every camera in the network You can use this test to determine if the NVR has a camera that is recording a very dark or potentially black video The test runs for each camera once a minute it counts the number of pixels with intensity values less than the Darkness threshol
37. 0 090086349 1 411279214 2012 08 21T12 30 31 235499 0100 5 9 j video H264 Live Alarm Record jai x 1 175696804 1 180560969 5 345392411 2012 08 21712 30 31 235519 0100 video H264 Live Alarm Record 0 0 001428403 0 001778861 2 452088794 2012 08 21712 30 31 176774 0100 TOTAL RECORDING STATISTICS ACROSS ALL ACTIVE STREAMS A AGE 0 0 000 15 14 m 1949 80 Table 18 1 Recording Statistics Field Description Camera Camera input number Session Current active media database session ID associated with stream type for this camera Note there will be multiple sessions for the same camera depending on the stream types MIME Type Provided details on codec of data recorded in session Stream Type Indicates what type of stream recorded for this session i e live alarm and or record Current Buffer Usage Current percent used of the internal frame buffer will be 0 if no buffering is occurring i e frames are being written to the disk as they are received Avg Buffer Usage Average percent used of the internal frame buffer Max Buffer Usage Maximum percent used of the internal frame buffer Total Frames Total number of frames recorded in the session Missing Frames Total number of missing frames in the session percent missing Dropped Frames Total number of dropped frames in the session frames inserted into buffe
38. 1 Figure 18 1 Recording Performance Page eausa Storage Set 1 x Storage Set 1 1 1 n Avg Throughput MBps i i 2 67 68 08 68 87 15 80 00 68 19 80 60 y S Tine nonth day hhinn gt Procedure 18 1 Viewing the Recording Performance Statistics Step Action 1 Select Advanced from the main menu A American Dynamics 189 Operational Statistics 2 Select Storage Statistics The Rec Performance page opens Figure 18 1 3 Select the storage set you want to view the recording performance for from the Recording Performance dropdown list The graph updates displaying details for the selected storage set End Recording Statistics The Recording Statistics page displays recording statistics for each camera configured on the NVR There is also a Totals summary table displaying recording statistics for the total of all cameras on the NVR Table 18 1 and Table 18 2 contain details of the recording statistics displayed 190 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Operational Statistics Figure 18 2 Recording Statistics Page Rec Statistics oen me feere ae 12658 MIME TYPE video H264 Live Alarm K i i 0 062062998 0 039274316 1 439291619 2042 08 21712 30 31 231511 0100 videoH264 Live Alarm Record Jo 0 077098960 0 045746131 1 450411332 2012 08 21712 30 31 231607 0100 2 3 4 video H264 Live Alarm Record 0 118288251
39. Active on Unit Y Discovery Reboot Notification Configure J EERE Storage Alerts wv Alarms xis System Alerts Procedure 3 29 Email Alerts Settings Step Action Enter the IP address in the SMTP Server IP text box 2 Click Add Update Alert Recipient 3 Click the New Recipient Email Address option button and enter a recipient email address in the field and or click the Use Recipient Email Address option button and select an already entered address from the dropdown 4 Select the Alert Categories to be assigned to the address es using the check boxes 5 Click Save 6 Select the Alert Category check boxes 7 Click Enable Alert s 8 Click Test next to an alert category to send a test email alert 48 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR 9 Click Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 30 Completing the NVR Setup Note For further information on email alerts refer to Email Alerts on page 209 End Finish This section allows you to save a template of the current NVR settings These can then be used if the NVR is reinstalled or used to quickly configure another NVR with these settings Summary Page The Summary page is used to save a settings template file prior to finishing the setup process A saved template can be used in the future to set up an NVR with these settings Figure 3 27 Summary Page E VERSION If you wish to ch
40. Advanced Camera Configuration on page 89 However basic camera settings displayed in the Camera List can be edited within the Camera List page These include editing the camera name updating the recording mode enabling or disabling Motion Detection or Video Intelligence enabling disabling audio and configuring most stream configuration settings Procedure 8 1 Editing Basic Camera Settings via the Camera List Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List The Camera List opens Figure 8 1 3 Select Edit in the camera record for which you want to edit a camera list setting The fields that you can update are ready to edit A American Dynamics 85 Camera Configuration Figure 8 1 Camera List Fields STREAM 2 STREAM 1 IP ADDRESS 2 Live Alarm Rec Live Alarm Rec Analytics Analytics e e e e 192 168 100 686 Codec FPS Resolution Codec FPS Resolution W MJPEG v 5 w 640x480 v 4 Make the required changes to Name Use this field to update the name of the camera e Rec Use this to update the camera recording state You can choose Recording Off Recording Always Recording Normal Off Alarm On or D Recording Always With Alarm On For more information refer to Recording Statuses on page 95 Note To update a camera s recording state you must ensure the camera recording scheduler is disabled e Analytics Use this to change the analytic alarm setting You can se
41. Alarms Storage Configure Email alerts Configure Finish Summary Procedure 3 17 Roles Settings Step Action 1 To change the password for either the admin or operator user account select Edit next to the appropriate username 2 Edit the password as required and click OK 3 Click Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 18 Network General Settings Note For further information on Roles refer to Roles on page 138 End Network This section describes the network stage of the Setup Wizard including the General LAN DHCP WAN and Dynamic Bandwidth Network General Page The General page is used to edit the general network settings including domain name domain name servers default gateway RTSP port NTP status and NTP servers 32 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Figure 3 14 Network General Page v Welcome v Setup v Failover Domain Name Servers Defaut Gateway system RTSP Port 554 NTP Status Enabled Disabied NTP Servers Sey Cance Procedure 3 18 Network General Settings Step Action 1 To edit the following fields e Domain Name e Default Gateway RTSP Port Select the current value Edit the value as required 2 Click Save To edit the following fields e Domain Name Servers e NTP Servers a Select the icon A text box displays b Enter the Server addresses in the text box c Click Save AN cautio
42. Bluetooth Device Perso My Network Places My Documents My Computer Details Network Connections System Local Area Connection refers to the primary NICs that is on the client PC 5 Right click Local Area Connection 6 Select Properties The Local Area Connection Properties pop up displays A American Dynamics 247 Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Figure 24 3 Local Area Connection Properties fj Network Connections Bax amp vi 7 ess S Network Connections o E Create anew connection Change windows Firewall settings Disable this network device amp Repair this connection Si Rename this connection View status of this connection Change settings of this connection Other Places a GB Control Panel My Network Places My Documents S My Computer Details az Local Area Connection LAN or High Speed Internet File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help BD JO search Folders zz A Name Te Dial up Sprint Mobile Broadband Pantech Dial up LAN or High Speed Internet tP Wireless Network Connection Disable Status Personal AreaNe Repair Bridge Connections Bluetooth Network Personal Area Network Create Shortcut Rename LAN or High Speed Inter LAN or High Speed Inter LAN or High Speed Inter AN or High Speed Inter vy Ee Status Device Name Disconnected Firewalled Conexant HD
43. Finish Summary Note Enabling advanced storage allows you to create storage sets and to assign media folders of cameras to the created storage sets 5 Click Continue to advance to the next page If advanced storage configuration is enabled continue to Storage Sets Page Or If advanced storage configuration is disabled continue to Procedure 3 29 Email Alerts Settings Note For further information on assigning cameras manually to storage sets refer to Procedure 5 7 Reassigning a Camera to a Different Storage Set on page 69 End Storage Sets Page The Storage Sets page allows you to create custom storage sets from the media folders which were created during the Configuring Storage Partitions stage of the installation 5 American Dynamics 45 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Figure 3 24 Storage Sets Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Storage Sets l Preparation Add Storage Set Default Storage Set 1 Available Space 179 90 GB AMOUNT TO USI FOR MEDIA GB MEDIA FOLDER sdatalmedia2 Idata media3 AMOUNTTOUSE MOVETO FOR MEDIA GB STORAGE Si v Bandwidth Throtting si MEDIA FOLDER v DHCP 191 64 GB Cameras v Discovery Configure Alarms Storage v Configure Storage Sets Assign Cameras Email alerts Configure Finish Summary Procedure 3 27 Storage Set Settings Step Action C
44. Node from the iSCSI Configuration sub menu b Click Create c Enter a Name for the Node d Select the type of Authentication from the dropdown list The default is None Note Select CHAP to use a password for data transfer e Select the checkbox for the required Portal This is the portal which contains the NIC IP address f Click Confirm 5 American Dynamics 231 Appendix A Storage 232 10 11 Assign the required Virtual Drives a LUN Note The Virtual Drives are pre configured on the storage device a Select Volume configuration from the iSCSI RAID Rack menu The Volume configuration menu expands b Select Logical Unit c Click Attach d Select the virtual disk from the VD dropdown list e Select the LUN from the LUN dropdown list f Click Confirm The Virtual Disk is assigned to the LUN and appears in the Logical unit summary table g Repeat Steps c to f to assign all the required Virtual Disks to a LUN Configure the Network Settings on the NVR Log in to the NVR desktop as the Root user b Select Computer c Select YaST from the System menu The Control Center opens d Select Network Settings from the Network Devices section The Initializing Network Configuration window displays momentarily and the Network Settings page opens e Select the Overview tab f Select the storage network card g Click Edit h Select the Statically assigned IP Address option button i Enter the IP Address j Ent
45. Recording Performance 0 0 0 eee eae 189 Recording Statistics 0 0 eee eae 190 DISK ACDA 225 k Erea drei ee ad ede oe Ra ee eed oe ap ee eae HERS 193 Storage Statistics eise 6 ee eee 194 Storage Set Statistics srka aena s Tarus ee eee eed b ee eee ee eee 194 Storage Device Statistics 0 2 eae 195 Storage Statistics per Camera 0 0000 tees 196 Logs OVEIVIQW aana ean PANTIE EERE des Seite ash eee ae eee eaten area a 199 REMGVING LOS ected ache eh Pela ae SN besa ew OA Gs dd a ear ead ae ead 199 FTP Log Management 2 000 tee tees 201 Event LOGS esra ee eta dae ra a ae esas each ena her E ead bake 202 Camera Connection Errors 0 0 0c eee eae 203 Camera LOGS crsa si aSa EE IRETE EEA NIEAF ES ENESA DON ATNA REET SANSS 204 Audit Trall enasini saa ls ta ae a Ea aD E ee ee ee 206 Viewing Connected Clients 0 0 00 cect tet eee eee 207 Email Alerts OVEM EW nace asess hain a didi dab data wae ead Bea Waa hea eaten de Bede ae peal Sei 209 Advance Preparation 000 ccc cece tet 209 Setting Up Email Aleris aresep bea abba eee te da a e ee ete 210 SMTP Server IP Address 20 0 cece etna 210 Building the Recipient List 0 0 eae 211 Enabling and Disabling Email Alerts 0 0000 eee 212 Disabling Email Alerts fora Camera 00 00 c ee eee 213 Removing an Address from the Recipient List 0 0000 e eae 214 Alem LOGS 220 eraras er edt ad AE o
46. Server Ftp User Ftp directory Ftp password Test Upload End Event Logs 202 The Event Logs page is used primarily by American Dynamics technical support for troubleshooting The Event Log shows informational and error related events that have occurred on the NVR system When the Event Log is full the file is rotated all entries are cleared and a new Event Log is started The Event Log page provides a filter feature You can filter by the following criteria Emergency Critical Error Warning Info and Filter Text Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Live Video Cameras Network Advanced Failover Storage Statistics gt Logs Dark image Detection Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Monitor Output Tours Monitor Output Presets Hybrid Procedure 19 3 Figure 19 4 Event Logs Page ent Event Logs Log Filters ie ee a E a ce lll NO ug 21 16 00 50 err device_controller 5891 ERROR video 7 7 H264 0 createStream returned error Camera input 8 is disconnect ug 21 16 00 50 err device_controller 5891 ERROR device CreateVideoStream caught a CError error Camera input 8 is disconn aug 21 16 00 50 err device_controller S891 ERROR video 6 6 H264 0 createStream returned error Camera input 7 is disconnect ug 21 16 00 50 err device_con
47. Settings Note For further information on configuring an NVR as a Failover server refer to Procedure 17 1 Configuring Failover Mode for an NVR on page 179 End System This section describes the system stage of the Setup Wizard including the General and Roles pages System Info Page The System Info page is used to edit the NVR hostname location current date and current time Figure 3 12 System Info Page American Dynamics System Info Preparation Y Welcome KyjrySJp VideoEdge London 2012 06 11 15 15 YYYYMMDD HH MM Bandwidth Throtting DHCP Cameras Discovery Configure Alarms Storage Configure Email alerts Configure Finish Summary Procedure 3 16 System Info Settings Step Action 1 To edit the following fields 30 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR e Hostname e Current Date Time Select the current value Edit the value as required 2 To edit the Location select the city from the dropdown If your current location is not available select the nearest city that is listed Edit the setting and click Save Click Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 17 Roles Settings Note For further information on General System settings refer to General System Information on page 135 End Roles Page The Roles page is used to change the passwords for the admin and operator user accounts
48. Step Action 1 To edit the following fields e WAN IP address HTTP Port e Secure HTTP Port e Streaming Configured Port Select the current value Edit the value as required 2 Click Save Click Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 21 Dynamic Bandwidth Settings Note For further information on WAN settings refer to WAN Settings on page 157 End 36 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR Dynamic Bandwidth Page The Dynamic Bandwidth page is used to edit the Bandwidth Throttling settings including Bandwidth Priority Traffic smoothing WAN and LAN bitrate caps and Transcode Limit Figure 3 17 Dynamic Bandwidth Page American Dynamics Bandwidth Throttling Preparation Welcome Bandwidth Priority Setup v Failover v WAN Bandwidth Throttling DHCP Cameras Discovery Configure Alarms Storage Configure Email alerts Configure Finish Summary Procedure 3 21 Dynamic Bandwidth Settings Step Action 1 To edit the following fields e Bandwidth Priority Click the required option button Which of the available fields display will depend on which Bandwidth Priority option is enabled 2 Click Save 3 To edit the Traffic Smoothing values select the current values Update the values as required 4 Click Save To edit the following fields e WAN Bitrate Cap e LAN Bitrate Cap Select the required
49. WARNING For Motion Meta Data and or Video Intelligence alarms to be enabled the camera must be in one of the alarm recording modes with at least ONE alarm enabled Select Camera 1 axis 00408c7f4ce7 current Record status OO Oe Oo O Procedure 3 25 Alarms Settings Step Action Select the camera you want to add an alarm to from the Select Camera dropdown menu Select the Current Record Status for the camera Select Add Define the camera alarm and select Save kh O N Note Depending on the camera s settings you can select Motion Detection or Video Intelligence alarms 5 Click Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 26 Basic Settings Note For further information on the Motion Detection and Video Intelligence refer to Motion Detection on page 103 and Video Intelligence on page 113 End Storage This section will describe the storage stage of the Setup Wizard 5 American Dynamics 43 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Basic Page The Basic page is used to edit storage settings including the vault media quota and whether advanced storage configuration is enabled Figure 3 22 Basic Page AMOUNT TO USE TYPE SIZE GB FOR MEDIA GB i A idevisda6 isata media2 idevisda7 e astameaias Bandwidth Throttling wid Advanced Storage Configuration Enabling advanced storage configuration will allow you to configure c
50. XP or Windows 7 operating system Setting QuickTime Preferences XP The QuickTime preferences you need to set when using Windows XP are e Set QuickTime to use UDP port 554 Procedure 23 3 Set QuickTime Preferences Step Action 1 Open a QuickTime window 2 Select Edit gt Preferences gt QuickTime Preferences from the menus 3 Select the Advanced tab 4 In the Transport Setup dropdown menu select Custom The Streaming Transport dialog box opens Figure 23 3 Streaming Transport dialog box Q QuickTime Preferences Register Audio el Streaming Advanced Streaming Transport Setup Custom PURTSP Proxy Server Address Download Cache Streaming Transport Port ID 554 X T Goa Media Encoding E Enable encoding using legacy codecs Tray Icon E Install QuickTime icon in system tray Select UDP from the Transport Protocol dropdown Select 554 as the Port ID Click OK Click OK You can close the QuickTime viewer by selecting File gt Exit N OMM End A American Dynamics 241 Appendix B Web Client Pre configuration 242 Setting QuickTime Preferences Windows 7 If you are accessing the NVR Web Interface from a Windows 7 PC you must adjust several settings so that QuickTime can properly display NVR video Turn off Windows Firewall e Turn off Internet Security Protect mode Enable Download unsigned Active X Contro
51. a plugin is required Selecting to Install the plugin will direct you to the Apple website You must have your storage and cameras configured before you can view live video A American Dynamics 73 Live Video American Dynamics A Tyco International Company 1 Camera View Live Video gt 1 Camera View 2x2 Camera View Cameras Storage System Network Advanced Figure 6 1 Live Video View B 7 gt Camera viewing window Setup Use to edit settings for Recording Mode Displays the current recording mode for the selected camera Procedure 6 1 Viewing Live Video the selected camera Select camera to view dropdown list Use to select the camera to be displayed in the viewing window Step Action 1 Select Live Video from the main menu 2 Select 1 Camera View Or Select 2x2 Camera View 3 Select the camera s you want to view from the Select camera to view dropdown list The camera s live video stream displays in the viewing window 74 End Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Live Video Viewing Live Video with QuickTime You can click on the viewing area of a camera to open a QuickTime viewer showing that camera s video stream Figure 6 2 Figure 6 2 QuickTime Viewer Procedure 6 2 Opening a QuickTime Viewer for a Camera Step Action 1 From any camera live view click in the camera viewing window A QuickTime Internet Authorization
52. ate Deeb a a a a oe tee ae oA 59 Overview of Storage Sets 00 eee ae 59 Verifying Storage Devices 0 0 0 eee nee 60 Basic Storage Configuration saaa aaa aaaea 60 vi VideoEdge NVR 4 2 1 Installtion and User Manual Table of Contents Enabling Media Folders for Storage 1 1 0 cee 61 Disabling Storage Media Folders 0 0 c ee eee 62 Allocating Storage Space for Media 00 00 ee 63 Data Culling 22 48 2 a50 24 0 eee iets TAE T ea awe daw nd on beet oe eed 63 Vaulted Medias 22 402 644 eevee see ee ae va eta bade bea edad ean 64 Vault Media Quota 2 2 eens 64 Advanced Storage Configuration 00 aea 65 Creating Storage Sets 2 2 eee 67 Storage Set Recommendations 0 0000 eae 67 Media Folder Assignment for Storage Sets 0 0 cee ee 68 Assigning Cameras to Storage Sets 0 0 00 cee eee tee eee 68 Calibrating Cameras 0 eadi inaa aa E a a 69 Deleting Storage Sets 0 0 70 Slorage SaS eeose a ev eee Soa oe Ree Re We Peed Pee de ee ate 71 Storage Monitoring 0 0 0c eee ee eee 71 Live Video OVON OW aner etn esa dae EEE Miata ak nde Meee een lene tee oie nk aac ee 73 Viewing Live VideO sser cesars ec ec eee eee eee 73 Viewing Live Video with QuickTime 0000 cette eee 75 Camera List OVGIVIOW sy ee ta dees okay AL a ee eee ne a eae eae A hee ey dee 77 Viewing the Camera List 0 0 0 0 cette tee 79 S
53. be able to connect to the NVR Use the tracert command to determine if your communication with the NVR failing or timing out with another network device along the communications path See Troubleshooting with the Tracert Command Your Client PC can trace a route successfully to the NVR but still cannot connect to the NVR Web Interface Check to make sure that the NVR is operating correctly Can you use another Client PC to connect to the NVR Web Interface If no Clients can connect to the NVR Web Interface the NVR s Web Server might not be running correctly Reboot the NVR to restart the Web Server When the NVR is running again attempt to connect your Client PC again Assigning an IP Address to a Client PC 246 If you cannot access any network device and have no known hardware problems your client PC may not have an IP address In this section you will check if to see if your PC has an address and add one if necessary If you are unable to configure an IP address using these procedures contact your network administrator Procedure 24 1 Assigning an IP Address to a Client PC Windows XP Step Action Click Start in the Windows taskbar Mouse over My Network Places and right click Select Properties Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Networks Connections screen displays Figure 24 1 Selecting Properties of My Network Place
54. camera supports only a single stream the Stream 2 settings for Live Stream Alarm Stream Record Stream and Analytics Stream are unavailable Procedure 8 10 Configuring Stream Settings Step Action 1 Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List Click Setup in the camera record for which you want to edit stream settings The Function amp Streams page opens 4 Select the stream you want the camera to use for 5 American Dynamics 97 Camera Configuration a Live video b Alarms c Recording Select the Codec for each stream Select the FPS for each stream Select the Resolution for each stream If you are using a stream for analytics select the Quality Click Apply oOo AN oO End Configuring Alert Buffer Settings Use the Alerts section to configure pre alert and post alert recording buffer times Buffer times range from 30 seconds to 300 seconds defined in 10 second intervals Figure 8 9 Alert Tab axis 00408c7f4ce7 Axis 210 Alert recording Alert Pre Buffer seconds Alert Post Buffer seconds Dry Contacts Enabled Active State Dry Contact Input 1 HJA Cancel Procedure 8 11 Configuring Alert Recording Buffers Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List 3 Click Setup in the camera record for which you want to set alert recording buffers The Function amp Streams page opens 98 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Configuration
55. client Enabling Remote Desktop The NVR s desktop can be accessed from a remote PC using either Remote Desktop Protocol or Video Network Computing Enabling RDP Remote Desktop Remote Desktop Protocol is a proprietary protocol developed by Microsoft It allows you to access the NVR s desktop from a remote PC using the Remote Desktop Connection application Remote Desktop Connection may affect the performance of your NVR if it is fully configured If you are concerned by possible effects on performance you should use the VNC method of establishing a remote desktop instead Note Connection is usually through port 3389 Procedure 25 1 Enabling RDP Remote Desktop Step Action 1 Click Computer 2 Select YaST A American Dynamics 261 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting The Control Center opens Figure 25 1 Control Center YaST2 Control Center Network Services Filter ats R DNS Server Groups a D A Hostnames to HTTP Server Hardware Miscellaneous iSCSI Initiator fh iSCSI Target Network Devices A p Network Services BR Kerberos Client 2 LDAP Browser Security and Users Software 3 LDAP Client fm LDAP Server System Other Ez Mail Server w Network Services xinetd a NES Client a NFS Server S NTP Configuration Proxy Remote Administration R Remote Administration V c baj 488 Samba Server fee SSHD Configuration 40 TFTP Server B Windows Domain Member
56. configurations for Codec FPS Resolution and Quality in the respective dropdown fields Note When you are selecting a value for the Codec FPS Resolution and Quality fields each dropdown list contains the available options followed by a number in brackets The number in brackets represents the number of cameras that support the value out of the total number of cameras being edited If a codec has not been selected the dropdown list will display options supported on all codecs It is important to note that if this is the case some options may fail on some cameras Stream 1 For example Codec MJPEG 4 4 indicates that 4 out of the 4 cameras being updated supports the Codec MJPEG Click Apply A Confirm Changes window opens with a preview of the changes to be made to the selected cameras Figure 8 3 Confirm Changes Confirm changes The changes listed below will be applied to all selected cameras Audio enabled Stream 1 Codec mrav Stream 1 FPS 5 Stream 1 Resolution 320x240 Are you sure you wish to proceed aua Cancel Click Apply Note If you do not want to make these changes to all cameras click Cancel and update the settings as required A message box opens to confirm the changes were successful Click OK Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Configuration Figure 8 4 Successful Batch Edit SUCCESS The changes were applied successfully Click Ok to conti
57. dialog box opens Enter your User ID Enter your Password 4 Click OK The QuickTime viewer End A American Dynamics 75 Live Video 76 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Overview Camera List The Camera List displays a list of all cameras added to the NVR The Camera List summary table Table 7 1 gives a summary of all camera configuration settings that are available to view and edit in the Camera List page You can add cameras to the NVR remove cameras and edit camera settings from the Camera List If you want multiple cameras to have the same configuration settings you can batch edit numerous cameras and all assigned settings will be the same for all selected cameras provided the camera has the ability to support the selected settings American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Live Video Cameras List Alarms Scheduler Passwords Discovery Storage System Network Advanced Hybrid Camera List Figure 7 1 Camera List IP ADDRESS 192 168 100 66 Axis 210 axis 00408c7f4ce TY EY ETD m Rec Analytics Table 7 1 Camera List Summary A Tyco Intemational Company Field Description No Camera slot number IP Address Camera IP address A American Dynamics 77 Camera List Field Description Name Camera name as given when adding
58. fields used for basic storage configuration Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Basic Figure 5 1 Basic Storage Configurati Configuring Storage on Live Video Cameras Storage Vault Media Quota of total storage 5 Basic Advanced System Idevisdb1 USE FOR MEDIA FOLDER STORAGE data1 Network Idevisde1 Idata2 Advanced idevisdd1 Idata3 Hybrid Idevisde1 datas idevisdf1 idataS Idevisdas Idata bos2nfs02 americas tsp ad export releases Jreleases A Tyco Intemational Company Table 5 1 Basic Storage Configuration Fields Field Description Device A physical device detected by the NVR Use for Storage Indicates whether or not the device is being used for storage Green indicator Enabled for storage Gray indicator Disabled for storage Red indicator Media folder is unhealthy Media Folder The location on the device where recorded media will be stored Type Indicates the file system type for example XFS Size GB The total size of the storage device in GB Amount to Use for Media The total amount of space to be used for storing media before data culling begins on the stored media Note The amount of space to be used for media cannot exceed the total size
59. following tems M 0M Client for Microsoft Networks QoS Packet Scheduler M 2 File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks f Intemet Protocol Version 6 TCP IPv6 ZEB eet tcl veson TCP D Link Layer Topology Discovery Responder Link Layer Topology Discovery Mapper 1 0 Driver Description across diverse interconnected networks install Uninstal Properties Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication ok Cancel 7 Select the General Tab It provides two options for assigning an IP address to the PC Obtain an IP address automatically When this option is selected the client PC will obtain its IP address from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server The IP address will change every time the machine boots up Use the following IP address Select this option if you want to manually configure the TCP IP settings This option is strongly recommended because you can specify the IP address which makes it easier to do network troubleshooting should the need arise 8 This pop up menu also provides two options for assigning a DNS address You may or may not need a DNS address depending on the network Consult your network administrator for more information 5 American Dynamics 251 Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting 10 e Obtain DNS server addr
60. for hosting the NVR software Table 2 2 Recommended System Specification Processor Single Intel E2620 Memory 8GB 4 x 2GB modules System Drive Minimum 500GB Hard Drive Video Storage Minimum 500GB Hard Drive RAID Controller PERC H710 Integrated RAID Controller Network Interface Cards Minimum 2 x 1G NICs Keyboard amp Mouse Required for installation and setup only Monitor Required for installation and setup only Operating System None OS will be installed with the VideoEdge Software Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR Overview This chapter describes the installation and configuration process for the NVR The NVR is supplied as either a hardware and software bundle or as a software only bundle NVR Hardware and Software Bundle When the NVR is supplied as a pre configured hardware and software bundle the basic system settings including time and region are already applied The system will also have default partitioning already carried out including the required system partitions and some media partitions If the configured media partitions are not suitable these can be edited as required after installation for further information refer to Editing Storage Partitions Using Partitioner on page 272 The NVR is supplied with its NIC ethO enabled it s set to resolve a DHCP IP address or will be assigned a de
61. might be contactable as https 70 30 22 81 554 while NVR2 is contactable as https 70 30 22 81 100554 The firewall is configured to accept NVR2 requests at https 70 30 22 81 100554 and forward them to https lt NVR2 private IP gt 554 This field must be set in scenarios where multiple NVRs are situated behind the same NAT firewall In this example this field on NVR2 must be set to 10554 Procedure 15 14 Editing the Streaming Configured Port Step Action Select Network 2 Select WAN Settings The WAN settings page opens 3 To edit the Streaming Configured Port select the current value Update the Streaming Configured Port as required The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 Click Save A confirmation message displays Note The default HTTP Port value is 554 End Allowed IP Addresses These are the public IP addresses that are permitted for use with the NVR A public IP address is one which is not in the following ranges e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 e 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 5 American Dynamics 161 Network Settings Procedure 15 15 Adding Allowed IP Addresses Step Action Select Network 2 Select WAN Settings The WAN Settings page opens 3 To add an IP Address to the Allowed IP Address select the icon The IP Address and Subnet Mask text boxes display The NIC dropdown displays Enter the IP address in the IP Address f
62. no assigned cameras or media folders Procedure 5 9 Deleting a Storage Set Step Action Select Storage from the main menu 2 Select Advanced The Advanced Storage Configuration page opens Figure 5 2 3 Reassign all media folders currently assigned to the storage set you want to delete see Procedure 5 6 Assigning Reassigning Media Folders to a Storage Set on page 68 for further information 4 Reassign all cameras currently assigned to the storage set you want to delete see Procedure 5 7 Reassigning a Camera to a Different Storage Set on page 69 for further information Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Configuring Storage 5 Click the Delete button under the storage set you want to delete Note If you have not reassigned all cameras and media folders the NVR will not allow you to delete the storage set End Storage Statistics The NVR holds and displays storage statistics for storage devices storage sets and cameras that are being used in the NVR storage configuration These can be accessed via the Advanced menu Refer to Storage Statistics on page 194 for further information Storage Monitoring All media folders assigned to a storage set will be monitored by the NVR to determine that they are operational and available for storing media The media folders are checked to ensure they are still mounted and read writable It is possible that media folders can become unmounted due to system errors
63. no longer be accessible when the Failover NVR takes over for a failed NVR Figure 17 1 Failover Window American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Live Video Cameras Storage System Network Advanced Failover e Statistics Logs Dark image Detection Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Monitor Output Tours Monitor Output Presets Hybrid Failover Failover Currently this NVR is not configured as a failover The failover NVR must have a license for at least the same amount of cameras as the NVR with the most cameras licensed that it is monitoring Enable this NVR as a Failover Server A Tyco Intemational Company Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates Configure Failover Mode for an NVR You must fully configure storage on the Failover NVR that will suit all NVR camera configurations that will be monitored before configuring and enabling Failover Mode Procedure 17 1 Configuring Failover Mode for an NVR Step Action Select Advanced from the main menu 2 Select Failover The Failover page opens Click Enable this NVR as a Failover Server Click Add New Server Enter details of the NVR you want the failover NVR to monitor a Enter the Server s IP into the Server field b Enter the Server s Username c Enter the Server s Password d Select the Enab
64. of the storage device but must meet the minimum storage requirement 10GB Enabling Media Folders for Storage If there are devices available in the basic storage configuration table media cannot be recorded to 5 American Dynamics 61 Configuring Storage these devices until the corresponding media folder s are enabled for storage By default when a device is added to the NVR the media folder is NOT enabled for storage You must enable the media folders for storage in order to store media Procedure 5 1 Enabling a Media Folder to be Used for Storage Step Action 1 Select the Storage menu 2 Select Basic The Basic Storage Configuration page opens Figure 5 1 3 Select the checkbox for the media folder you want to use for storage and click Add To Storage Or Select EDIT in the media folder record you want to use for storage in the Use For Storage field select the dropdown arrow F click the Enable indicator then select Save The Use For Storage indicator turns green indicating that the media folder is to be used for storage Note If there has been media already stored in the folder a pop up window will open asking Do you wish to delete all previously recorded media from this folder Click Yes or No as required End Disabling Storage Media Folders 62 If you need to remove a media folder from storage you must disable it When a media folder is removed from storage the recorded media i
65. paid aa 261 Enabling Remote Desktop 0 0 00 c eee eae 261 Enabling RDP Remote Desktop 0 0c cece eae 261 Enabling VNC Remote Desktop 0 0000 eee eee 263 Accessing the Remote Desktop 0 0 00 ccc eee 264 RDP Remote Desktop 00000 cece eee 264 Logging Out of RDP Remote Desktop a a 0 0 00 ce ee 266 VNC Remote Desktop 000000 teeta 267 Editing the Network Settings Using Control Center 0 2000 270 Editing Storage Partitions Using Partitioner 0 0 cece ee 272 Configuring System Partitions on a Previously Configured Device 272 Editing Media Partition Configurations 0 00 cee eee 273 System Disk Recovery 0 6c eee eee eens 275 VIdeOEdge NVR ce aeed a eeschae deed eid ba eae gece ae ag aaah eet 275 Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 OVERVIEW fae he eee eee VA ba bal eae pe ae Od ee ead Wa aes eed OS 279 Download and Deletion of NVR 4 1 ISO Files 22000000005 279 NVR 4 1 to NVR 4 2 1 Upgrade nananana ccc ete 280 Using the 4 1 Upgrade Tool to Launch the YaST Wizard 282 Using the YaST Wizard 0 0 eta 284 Completing the Upgrade 0 0 0 eee 288 Changing the Disk Boot Order 0 000 eae 291 NVR 4 1 to 4 2 1 Migration Failure Recovery 0 00 e eee eee eae 292 End User License Agreement EULA 295 Index 301 5 American Dynamics xiii Over
66. process of the NVR you will be prompted to licence your NVR At this stage you can generate a Host ID and apply the licence alternatively you can continue through the Setup Wizard and use the temporary NVR license Note 1 The NVR software has a 60 day trial period with a maximum of 128 camera license 16 analytic cameras 2 Ifyou do not purchase a license by the end of the trial period the camera and storage functions are automatically disabled To apply a licence use the Licencing page in the NVR web interface Figure 14 1 From here you can Generate a Host ID Apply a Licence edit the Software Service Agreement SSA message add edit SSA Contacts and add edit the SMTP Server The Licensing Status section provides a summary of the license type the number of cameras that are licensed on the NVR the number of cameras with analytics that are licensed on the NVR and the time remaining on the current license A licence is generated based on the number of devices attached to the NVR This can be either a camera or a camera encoder with multiple analog cameras attached A license generated for one NVR cannot be used with another NVR however you can replace cameras and devices on the NVR without requiring a license change To licence the NVR you must generate a Host ID specific to your NVR and enter the ID on the online registration page This can be accessed using the VideoEdge Licensing Activation Icon on the NVR Desktop or via the Ame
67. select this checkbox if the system s hardware clock is set to UTC 8 Click Next The Suggested Partitioning page displays End Configure Storage Partitions After the system information settings have been configured for the NVR you can set up the required storage partitions The NVR s storage consists of system and media partitions System partitions are where the operating system and VideoEdge software resides and system files such as swap and var are stored The System partitions consists of 3 parts 1 The root partition This is where the operating system VideoEdge software and executables are stored 2 The var partition var This is where configuration and other variable non video files are stored 3 The swap partition swap This is the location of the operating system swap file Media partitions are where audio and video from the associated cameras will be stored Note On the first media drive of the NVR you must create two media partitions The first partition created on this drive must be 100GB with the mount point var opt americandynamics venvr clipexport The size of the second partition must be the remainder of the media drive You can enter a mount point name as required for example data It is recommended that the remaining media drives on the NVR are configured with 1 partition and formatted in the XFS file system type If this is the first time the NVR 4 2 1 software has been installed
68. that only requires a minimum of two drives and may give read performance on the level of RAID 0 RAID 5 Preserves against the loss of any one disk by combining the contents of three or more disks However the total storage capacity is reduced by one disk This configuration is often used with VideoEdge because of RAID 5 s performance in situations where data transfers are I O intensive RAID 5 Performance Benchmarks The Server Company Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix A Storage Figure 22 1 RAID 5 BlockA BlockB Block C Block D Ap Dp Parity Sections Disk 0 Disk 1 Disk 2 Disk 3 e RAID 6 Preserves against the loss of two disks failing at once by combining the contents of three or more disks However the total storage capacity is reduced by two disks Figure 22 2 RAID 6 BlockA BlockB Block C Block D Block E Ap Ep Parity Sections Aq Eq Parity Sections Disk 0 Disk 1 Disk 2 Disk 3 Disk 4 Virtual Disks Logical Unit Numbers e A virtual disk represents an individually addressable logical SCSI device that is a partition of a physical SCSI device target e Virtual disks are also known as volumes or LUNs e In enterprise level systems virtual disks usually represent segments of large RAID disk arrays A American Dynamics 223 Appendix A Storage Storage Strategy In order to properly configure an NVR it is important to understand how much storage you will re
69. the Advanced configuration options to assign storage devices and cameras to Storage Sets System Menu The System menu has sub menu items General Roles Licensing Templates Backup Restore and Update Software General Use to configure and edit general system information Roles Use to edit role password settings Licensing Use to view your VideoEdge NVR license information apply a license or upgrade your license Templates Sub menu consists of two pages Use the Save Template page to create a custom template based on the settings that are currently configured within the NVR these include Camera Settings Storage Settings User Information Network Settings Email Settings and Failover Settings Use the Import Template page to apply an existing template file to the NVR which will edit its settings accordingly Backup Restore Sub menu consists of two pages Use the Backup page to create a backup of the Camera settings System Settings User information DHCP Settings and NTP Settings Use the Restore page to upload a backup file to restore the NVR settings to the configuration of that Backup file Update Software Use to browse and upload a software upgrade package 5 American Dynamics 55 Using the NVR Interface 56 Network Menu The Networks menu has menu items General LAN Interface DHCP Server WAN Settings and Dynamic Bandwidth General Use to configure general network settings such as the Domain Name D
70. the PC is connected to the network ping This command helps you determine if you can communicate with another computer in the network tracert This command displays where network data goes when it travels to a destination It can help you find out where a network problem is located Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Launching the Windows Command Prompt To use the troubleshooting commands we will need the Windows command prompt To launch the command prompt perform the following steps Procedure 24 3 Launch Windows Command Prompt Windows XP Step Action 1 Click Start then Run in the Windows taskbar 2 Type cmd in the field provided then click OK Figure 24 10 Start Then Run Commands Internet Mozilla Firefox _ E mail Microsoft Office Outlook yxClient fa Notepad Adobe FrameMaker 8 pa Adobe Acrobat 8 Standard Cx Alert Console All Programs gt SQL Server Configuration Manager W My Documents B My Recent Documents gt 2 My Pictures B My Music as My Computer a My Network Places B Control Panel Set Program Access and Defaults Connect To gt 5 amp Printers and Faxes pP Search 7 Run 3 After clicking OK The command prompt window opens A American Dynamics Run X Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it Fo
71. the ability to use a bespoke hostname to identify multiple NVRs on a network and in victor client When the hostname of an NVR is changed it will automatically change in the device list within victor client Procedure 13 1 Editing the Hostname Step Action Select System from the main menu 2 Select General The System Info page opens 3 To edit the Hostname select the current value Update the Hostname as required The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 Click Save A confirmation message displays End 136 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Basic System Settings Location The location of the NVR can be defined A dropdown list provides a list of cities for you to choose from If the current location of the NVR is not included in the list it is recommended that you select the nearest city available Note When using an NTP Server the location is used to define the time and date as NTP servers use UTC time For further information refer to Network Settings on page 147 Procedure 13 2 Editing the Location Step Action Select System from the main menu 2 Select General The System Info page opens 3 To edit the Location select the city of the NVR or nearest city listed from the dropdown list The dropdown background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 Click Save A confirmation message displays End Current Date and Time The current d
72. the iSCSI and FibreRAID units Storage Strategy for FRS FES RAID Device Recommendations The FRS FES supports a maximum of eight 8 Disk Groups aka RAID sets Each Disk Group can be carved up into one or more Virtual Disks aka Volumes or LUNs It is recommended to try to maximize each virtual disk size It is recommended that Virtual Disks from a single Disk Group are all assigned to the same NVR Storage Set This will eliminate the possibility of unnecessary disk thrashing caused when the same set of physical disks DGs are being used by different sets of cameras aka Storage Sets Verify that you have the latest firmware patch or upgrade for your controller Make sure to leave a minimum of a 2U space between storage units Start the camera s recording after all the drives have been formatted and their status is Normal Connecting Additional Storage Devices Connecting NVR to FRS FES Using Fibre Before configuring external storage you must stop NVR Services Refer to Procedure 16 2 Stop NVR Services on page 170 Once you have connected and configured external storage devices you must restart the NVR Services Refer to Procedure 16 1 Restart NVR Services on page 170 Procedure 22 2 Connecting NVR to FRS FES Using Fibre Step Action Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Appendix A Storage Power OFF the NVR and install the Fibre HBA Kit P
73. they can either be in software or hardware e iSCSI does not require dedicated cabling it can use existing switching and IP equipment As a result iSCSI is thought to be a low cost alternative to Fibre Channel which requires dedicated infrastructure Fibre Channel e Fibre Channel or FC is a gigabit speed network technology primarily used for storage networking It got its start in the supercomputer field but has become the standard connection type for storage area networks SAN in enterprise storage e Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters HBAs are available for all major open systems computer architectures and buses for example PCI They are needed to connect a Fibre storage device to a server A American Dynamics 221 Appendix A Storage 222 Direct Attached Storage e This term is used to differentiate non networked storage from networking systems such as NAS and SAN However DAS cannot share information or space with other servers DAS are usually connected via SCSI cables along with a SCSI terminator DAS can also be connected via eSATA or USB Storage Types JBOD Just a Bunch of Disks RAID Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks JBOD The JBOD storage configuration is a group of disks without any RAID features depending on configuration in BIOS In NVR systems JBOD is rarely used with external devices RAID An umbrella term for computer data storage schemes that distribute data across m
74. to Storage 15 The connection and configuration of an iSCSI storage device is complete The iSCSI storage device can now be used to store media from the NVR End 5 American Dynamics 235 Appendix A Storage 236 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix B Web Client Pre configuration Overview For a client PC to communicate with the NVR and its web interface there are basic Windows configuration settings and software that must be in place Prerequisite Software There are several software components that need to be installed on the client PC before you can access a NVR using the Web Interface Each prerequisite software component can be downloaded from their respective company websites When the software items have been downloaded and saved to your computer you can double click the software packages and follow the installation instructions to complete the software installation process The correct drivers must also be installed for the PC s hardware for instance it is extremely important to load the manufacturers most current driver for a video card If the correct drivers are NOT installed you may get undesired effects and or damage the PC and its hardware The prerequisite software that needs to be installed are e Microsoft Windows Internet Explorer Version 8 or 9 e Java 6 and above Used by the web client user interface e QuickTime 7 7 and above e Optional Adobe Reader X and ab
75. to create the media partition from the system view tree Delete the existing partitions by selecting the partition and clicking Delete Click Add Select Primary Partition Enter the required partition size by selecting Custom Size and entering the amount of disk space GB you want to allocate to the partition Or Choose an allocated region on the disk for the partition by entering a Start Cylinder and End Cylinder Select Next Select the desired option from the File System dropdown For swap select Swap for var select XFS and for root select Ext3 Or Enter the Mount Point for the media partition For swap enter swap for var enter var and for root enter Click Finish Create the required media storage partitions Refer to Steps 5 to 11 of Procedure 3 8 Configuring Media Partitions on the Remaining Media Drives on the NVR on page 15 for further information Once all media partitions are created click Accept A summary of the partitions to be created are displayed If you want to edit any of the partitions click Edit Partition Setup and make the changes as required Click Next A summary of the partition layout to be created is displayed Click Install The Confirm Installation page is displayed Click Install The NVR Installation begins Note Installation can take up to ten minutes After basic installation is complete the system will need to be restarted Continue to Procedure 3 10 Rebooting the NVR Af
76. value from the dropdown Or a To use a custom value select Custom from the dropdown The custom entry field displays 5 American Dynamics 37 Installing the VideoEdge NVR 38 b To edit the bitrate cap value select the current value Update the value as required c Enter the desired bitrate cap value in the field Note The custom value must be entered in kbps For example to enter a value of 5 5Mbps you would type a value of 5500 6 To edit the Transcode Limit select the required value from the dropdown 7 Click Save 8 Click Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 22 DHCP Server Settings Note For further information on Dynamic Bandwidth settings refer to Bandwidth Priority on page 163 End DHCP Server Page The DHCP Server page is used to edit the DHCP server settings for each NIC including the DHCP status start range end range subnet and netmask Each NIC can be used to host a DHCP server for the LAN it is attached to If a NIC has been designated a Dynamic IP address it will not be available for editing on this page The DHCP Status page allows you to view all active devices which have been assigned a dynamic IP address by the NVR Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR Figure 3 18 DHCP Server Page This page allows the NVR to host a DHCP server on each network card plugged into the system it can be used to manage the IP addresses of came
77. you try to create a Video Intelligence alarm for a camera without Motion Detection or Video Intelligence enabled you will be prompted to edit the camera settings Procedure 10 3 Creating a Video Intelligence Camera Alarm Step Action Select Cameras in the main menu 2 Select Alarms The Camera Alarm Configuration page opens Figure 10 2 3 Select the camera for which you want to create a Video Intelligence alarm from the Select Camera dropdown list 4 Click Add Note If the Add button is not available you do not have Motion Detection or Video Intelligence enabled on the camera Enable Video Intelligence to continue refer to Procedure 10 1 Enabling Video Intelligence for a Camera 5 If required you can update the Current Record Status For Video Intelligence alarms to be enabled you must select either Recording Normal Off Alarm On or Recording Always with Alarm On refer to Table 8 1 Recording Statuses on page 95 for further Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Video Intelligence information 6 Enter an alarm Name max 50 characters Note Use a descriptive name that will make the alarm easy to identify 7 Select the Video Intelligence Type from the dropdown list a Object Detection Used to detect people or objects moving into a region of interest This alarm is similar to a motion alarm but only detects people or objects the first time they enter the region of interest A separate event is generated f
78. 0 Installing the NVR Software Only Bundle 0 000 eee eee 10 Verify the BIOS Configuration 0 0000 11 Boot your Computer Server Using the NVR Software CD or USB 11 Configure the NVR s System Information Settings 0 2 0 eae 12 Configure Storage Partitions 0 0 eae 13 Verify the Boot Loader location 0 cece eee eae 17 System Reboot After Basic Installation 0 0 00 c eee eee 21 Set Up NVR OS User Accounts 00000 20 cette eee 22 Log into the NVR Desktop 1 00 eens 24 VideoEdge Setup Wizard 1 0 teas 25 Accessing the Setup Wizard 0 000 c cee eee 26 A American Dynamics v Table of Contents Preparation n eaaa s area aia aad ee a a oad ee Oa aa ele a 27 Welcome Page 0 ccc eee eee eee 27 SElUP PAGS srece Gk dase ee Ae Sea A care ed ered Gokard te r avers 27 Failover Page riste di Eru enea EE S et EE OEA O 29 e e EEE E EEEE EEE E A E E E EE EE 30 system Info Page 2 22 662 araa fee cde gee AEREE eb eee eee eee ees 30 Roles Page misc sacks rete vee aE RAG PES d Ob dae pe Gd Rae ee ed 31 NetWork iva atc lanieed tb dda bidet engid de eid bh ied awed detaan 32 Network General Page 00 cette eae 32 LAN Interface Page 0 ce eae 34 WAN Settings Page 0 eee eee ene 36 Dynamic Bandwidth Page 0 0 eae 37 DHCP Server Pagese serar Verat TEE eee debe eben 38 CANG a sare tc eea Gee eee E
79. 0Mb 25Mb and 50Mb The retrieved log file is in zipped format it can either be opened as a temporary folder or saved local using the Windows file download window or other OS equivalent A American Dynamics 199 Logs 200 Advanced Figure 19 1 Retrieve Logs Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Retrieve Logs Live Video Cameras Start Date Time 2012 08 20 15 57 01 Storage End Date Time 2012 08 21 15 57 01 Retrieve Camera Logs V System Retrieve Recording Pipeline 7 Network Description Retrieve Camera Firmware 7 Details Failover _ Maximum Camera Log Size 10 MB i Storage Statistics Pus j Include Core Files Logs Dark Image Detection Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Monitor Output Tours Monitor Output Presets Hybrid A Tyco intemational Company Procedure 19 1 Retrieving Logs Step Action co O NOOA Select Advanced Select Logs The Retrieve Logs page opens Type the Start Date Time in the Start Date Time text box Note Enter in the following format Year Month Date Hours Minutes Seconds For example for 1pm on 21st January 2012 would be 2012 01 21 13 00 00 Or Select the Start Date Time field and a calendar opens You can use the calendar to select the date and use the sliders to adjust the time Type the End Date Time in the End Date Time text box in the same format described in step 3
80. 1 Installation and User Manual A Tyco Intemational Company Logs Viewing Connected Clients You can view the clients currently connected to the NVR using the Connected Clients sub menu The NVR will only register a client as connected if it is actively receiving a video audio stream from the NVR The Connected Client page displays information relating to the clients currently connected to the NVR and their activity The following information is displayed when a client is connected to the NVR The IP Address of the device which is streaming audio and video from the NVR via victor unified client The Camera Number for each camera being streamed from the NVR for each client connected to the NVR The Media Type being streamed either audio or video or both The Client type for example victor unified client or QuickTime The Streaming Protocol being used Figure 19 8 Connected Clients Page p0 S157108 connected cents American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Connected Clients Live Video Cameras Connected Clients Sompo P Address Camera No MediaType Client Stream Protocol 192 168 200 210 Victor Client UDP System 192 168 200 210 Victor Client UDP Network 192 168 200 210 Victor Client UDP Advanced Failover 192 168 200 210 Victor Client UDP Storage Statistics Logs Dark Image Detection Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports gt Connected Clients Rese
81. 4 1 Upgrade Tool to Launch the YaST Wizard on page 282 5 American Dynamics 281 Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Figure 26 3 Upgrade Wizard PX Rao J File Edit View Terminal Help l Ls fe 4 1 Upgrade Tool ae AANO ti ALA Installer rani NVR 4 1 to 4 2 Upgrade This program will backup NVR 4 1 data in preparation for installing NVR 4 2 lt Cancel gt OB OB No swap End caution This is the last stage that it is still possible to revert back to the 4 1 software Clicking Install will initiate the installation Using the 4 1 Upgrade Tool to Launch the YaST Wizard The 4 1 Upgrade Tool will guide you through the first stage of the upgrade process and initialise the second stage When the second stage is initialized the YaST wizard will launch to configure your NVR s settings Procedure 26 4 Using the 4 1 Upgrade Tool to Launch the YaST Wizard Step Action 1 Use the arrow keys to highlight OK press the Return key This will initiate the first stage of the upgrade Backup of the 4 1 application and OS settings 282 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 The upgrade tool will pre check that it can restore the NVR 4 1 IP addresses and connect to any external storage devices for example iSCSI drives A progress bar will display percentage completion of the pre check process Figure 26 4 Backup Progress Bar Termi
82. 4 91 G8 Delete partition dev sdb3 7 45 G8 Create swap volume devi sdb1 14 91 GB Create volume dev sdb2 18 63 GB for var with xfs Create root volume dev sdb3 7 45 GB with ext3 Booting Boot Loader Type GRUB Location dev sda MBR Sections SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 defauk Failsafe SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 Order of Hard Disks dev sda devisdb One Ox c W Computer Terminal Terminal Svs x 4B Fri Sep 14 3 07 PM BB BOZFIO Aeae Procedure 3 9 Verifying the Boot Loader Location Step Action 1 Check the boot loader location on the Live Installation Settings page If the location for the boot loader is on the same disk as where the software operating system will be installed click Install and continue to Procedure 3 10 Rebooting the NVR After Basic Installation Note Installation may take up to ten minutes depending on computer server hardware If the location of the boot loader is on a different disk you need to change the boot loader location Continue to Step 2 In the Live Installation Settings page select the Booting hyperlink Select the Boot Loader Installation tab Select Boot Loader Installation Details The boot loader Device map page opens as shown in Figure 3 4 below Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR Figure 3 4 Boot Loader Device Map gt 42 NVR Test Snapshot 1 Mochine Yew Qe
83. 5 9 11 Click OK End Editing Storage Partitions Using Partitioner Configuring System Partitions on a Previously Configured Device If you are installing or upgrading the NVR software on a device which has been previously configured there may be system partitions created already which will require re configuration To ensure your NVR is set up correctly the existing system partitions should be deleted The requirements for configuration are three system partitions in addition to the media storage partitions The system partitions are needed for regular operation of the NVR s operating system The required system partitions that need to be created are outlined in Table 25 1 Each partition size in the table is the recommended minimum value Table 25 1 Default Partitions Required for NVR Size GB Type FS Type Mount Point 16 Linux swap Swap swap 476 Linux native XFS var 8 Linux native Ext3 Procedure 25 8 Configuring System Partitions on a Previously Configured Device Step Action 1 In the Suggested Partioning page of the Partitioner Wizard click Create Partition Setup 2 Select Custom Partitioning for experts The Expert Partitioner page displays 272 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Nn oO oO f 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting To edit the partitions and create partitions for media storage Select the disk on which you want
84. A D110 MD Dell Wireless 1390 WLAN 1394 Net Adapter Broadcom Netxtreme 57 SonicWALL VPN Adapter Disabled Firewalled Connected Firewalled Connected Firewalled Connected Firewalled Disconnected Firewalled Bluetooth Device Perso Connected Firewalled js T gt 7 Under the General tab and in the section labeled This connection uses the following items scroll down until you see Internet Protocol TCP IP and highlight it 8 Click Properties The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties pop up displays Figure 24 4 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties h Local Area Connection Properties we Authentication Advanced Connect using B Broadcom NetXtreme 5 7xx Gigabit C This connection uses the following items v A QoS Packet Scheduler x v3 2 0 3 Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected ao m i Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity 9 Select the General tab It provides two options for assigning an IP address to the PC Obtain an IP address automatically When this option is selected the client PC will obtain its IP address from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server The IP address will change every time the machi
85. A Tyco International Company Save Template Live Video Templates Cameras Select the settings to save then click Save to save a template of your NVR Storage NOTE A template file can be used to add to and or update an existing configuration System Man General M camera Settings Roles E Storage Settings Licensing I user information F Network Settings F Email Settings F Failover Settings Templates Backup Restore Update Software PTZ Serial Protocols Save Network Advanced Hybrid A Tyco Intemational Company Save a Configuration Template You can create a configuration template using the Templates functionality in the NVR interface You can choose the type of configuration settings to be stored in the template If you want to save camera configuration settings to a template you must ensure that those cameras are connected to the NVR before the template is created Procedure 17 5 Creating a Configuration Template Step Action Select System from the main menu 2 Select Templates The Save Template page opens 3 Select the required checkboxes for the configuration settings that you want saved to the template a All Camera Settings Storage Settings b c d User Information e Network Settings f Email Settings g Failover Settings 4 Click Save 5 Select Save As 5 American Dynamics 185 NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates 186 Navigat
86. ADDRESS MACADDRESS NAME P ADDRESS MAC ADDRESS INPUT RESOLVE FROM TEMPLATE General LAN v WAN r F 19216810088 o0408c7t ce7 axi oososerisce7 1 Bandwidth Throtting v DHCP Cameras Discovery Configure Alarms Storage Configure Email alerts Configure Finish Summary IMPORT TO NVR T Procedure 3 23 Discovery Settings Step Action Select the camera network NIC from the dropdown 2 Select Discover Discovered devices will display in the Discovered Device List 3 Select checkbox for cameras you want to add Use the arrow 77 to move selected cameras to the NVR list Select the checkbox for the cameras you want to add in the NVR list Select Import to NVR 40 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR 6 Select Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 24 Camera List Settings Note For further information on Camera and Device Discovery refer to Procedure 7 5 Adding Cameras using Auto Discovery on page 83 End Camera List Page The Camera List page is used to manually add IP cameras and devices to the NVR Figure 3 20 Camera List Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Camera List Preparation TY EE ET No a IP ADDRESS Axis 210 192 168 100 66 axis 00408c7f4 Procedure 3 24 Camera List Settings Step Action 1 Select Add New
87. Address Camera Type Password Group 0 default Storage Set 1 AJDA Cancel Edit a Camera Name You can update the name given to a camera as required Procedure 8 3 Editing a Camera Name Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List 3 Click Edit in the camera record where you want to change the camera name select the Name field and enter the new camera name Or Click the Setup button in the camera record where you want to change the camera name select the General tab and enter the new camera name into the Camera Name field Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Configuration 4 Click Apply End Change the Password Group Assigned to an IP Camera If an IP camera is assigned to a password group and you have changed the password for this camera you will need to select the new password group the camera belongs to Procedure 8 4 Changing the Password Group Assigned to an IP Camera Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List 3 Click the Setup button in the camera record that you want to assign to a new password group The Function amp Streams page opens Select the General tab Select the new password group from the Password Group dropdown list Click Apply Note If you are editing the password group for a camera forming part of an encoder device all cameras related to this device will be updated with the new password group In this ins
88. Amount to Use for Media GB The total amount of space to be used for storing media before the stored media begins to data cull Note The amount of space to be used for media cannot exceed the total size of the storage device Move to Storage Set A dropdown list of other storage sets available on the NVR By selecting a storage set you will move the media folder to that storage set Using the Advanced Storage Configuration page you can e Create storage sets e Delete storage sets e Add media folders to storage sets e Move media folders between storage sets Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Configuring Storage e Assign cameras to storage sets e Move cameras between storage sets e Calibrate cameras By using a combination of the advanced configuration options and your calculated storage requirements per camera you can configure the NVR to achieve optimal efficiency and performance Creating Storage Sets You can create a new storage set to group particular media folders and cameras When a new storage set is created it contains no media folders or cameras you need to reassign these from another storage set Storage Set Recommendations If you are using RAID storage systems American Dynamics strongly recommends assigning all virtual disks from a disk group to the same storage set It is recommended that a storage set should contain a minimal number of media folders one if possib
89. Apply Reset to Factory Defaults AND Keep Media This will preserve all your recorded media NOTE this option will keep both the media and the current media database If there are continuing issues a reset with full media re indexing is recommended Choose this option for a quick reset of NVR settings but preserve all media and databases Apply Reset to Factory Defaults AND Re index Media This will keep all your recorded media and it will also re index the recorded media Shutdown this means it will completely rebuild the media database from scratch The reindex process is a Time intensive and could take at least several hours depending on the volume of recorded data and the storage type local disks or network storage b Service affecting eg the NVR will not be able to record or display live video until the media re indexing is complete Hybrid Choose this option if the media database has become corrupted and you are unable to playback media Apply Monitor Output Tours Monitor Output Presets A Tyco International Company e Email Alerts will all be disabled and any email addresses entered for alert notifications will be erased The SMTP Server address will also be erased 5 American Dynamics 173 System Shutdown and Reset Factory Defaults 174 American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Live Video Cameras Storage System Network Advanced Failover Storage Statistics Logs Dark Image
90. Camera Add Camera Window opens Enter camera name in the Camera Name textbox Enter the cameras IP address in the Internal IP Address textbox 5 American Dynamics 41 Installing the VideoEdge NVR 42 4 Select the Password Group from the dropdown list Note The Password Group will usually be default The NVR will use the manufacturers default password to connect to the camera However if you have changed the password for this camera you need to assign the camera to the appropriate password group or create a new password group For further information on password groups refer to Camera Password Groups on page 131 5 Optional If multiple storage sets are defined select the Storage Set from the dropdown list 6 Select Apply 7 Select Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 25 Alarms Settings Note For further information on adding cameras manually refer to Procedure 7 4 Manually Adding an IP Camera or Encoder on page 81 End Alarms Page The Alarms page is used to configure Video Intelligence and Motion Detection alarms for individual cameras Motion Detection or Video Intelligence must be enabled on each camera for which you wish to configure alarms Note This stage is not available when using Firefox on the local machine Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR Figure 3 21 Alarms Page American Dynamics Alarms Preparation Welcome
91. Cl e Connect the AD Fibre RAID Storage to the NVR Reboot the NVR and log in to the NVR desktop as the Root User Select Computer Select YaST from the System menu The Control Center opens Select Partitioner A warning message opens Click Yes The Expert Partitioner window opens Expand the Hard Disks menu Right click the new storage device from the list of hard disks then click Edit Click Add The Add Partition window opens Set the new partition size You can select Maximum Size Custom Size and enter a value or select Custom Region where you can choose the disk cylinders for the partition Note In order to use a disk partition for storage it must meet the minimum storage capacity requirements 10GB Click Next Ensure the Format partition option button is selected Select XFS from the File system dropdown menu Select the Mount Partition option button Enter the Mount Point for the disk Select the Fstab Options button Enter nofail rw noatime nodiratime attr2 nobarrier noquota allocsize 4m in the Arbitrary option value field Note nobarrier should only be used on storage devices connected to disk controllers with battery backed cache Click OK Note Each mount point should have a unique name however it is good practise to use a folder structure naming convention for example mount point 1 data mediat mount point 2 data media2 mount point 3 data media3 etc Click Finish
92. Configuration and User Guide 52 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Using the NVR Interface By configuring the NVR through victor you can configure your NVR in exactly the same way as via the web interface However when using victor you do not have the option to view live video Instead use the Surveillance pane in the victor client to view NVR cameras in live mode Procedure 4 2 Accessing the victor NVR Configuration Interface Step Action 1 In the victor client expand Recorders in the Device List 2 Expand the VideoEdge folder Right click on the NVR recorder you want to configure Figure 4 2 victor NVR Configure option Home Setup FE switch i Clips P Refresh amp Search and Retrieve jj Surveillance 4 1 Activity Call p f ups Bi Surveillance i Device List we AK t Fim Workstations a Analog Matrices e M General Purpose Devices 4 ma Recorders ip intellex i HDVR 4 B VideoEdge Gi videoedge Ry Edit mA Configure m Delete Fey View Fey Send To Find in Journal E eal ie a EA Alert 0 BELIWKD112 cork BB Refresh Videotdge 10 Mbps or higher inactive lf 2 4 Select Configure The NVR configuration interface opens Figure 4 3 End 5 American Dynamics 53 Using the NVR Interface Figure 4 3 NVR Interface Main Menu Select each menu item to About Select this to find out NVR and display a sub menu for each category System information
93. Data None z Motion Sensitivity Recording Retention Period 0 Days 0 Hours Audio Settings Enabled Stream Configuration MORE INFO Stream 1 Stream 2 Live Alarm Record 25 x 01 x x E RESOLUTION RESOLUTION Analytics Live Alarm Record Analytics VBR w 4000 Base BIT RATE CONTROL MAX BIT RATE PROFLE 70 z QUALITY NTs Cancel You must ensure you have a Stream Specification that allows the NVR to generate meta data for Video Intelligence You also need to select Video Intelligence in the Generate Meta Data field The NVR will automatically determine the required settings and apply them to a stream If the camera is configured for dual stream then the NVR chooses the best stream If the NVR is unable to find a suitable video stream for Video Intelligence an error message opens Video intelligence may not be available for a particular camera if the camera s video resolution setting is lower than the minimum or higher than the maximum acceptable resolution for Video Intelligence The NVR will not allow you to configure a camera for Video Intelligence if the resolution setting of the camera is outside of the settings in Table 10 1 Table 10 1 Camera Resolutions for Video Intelligence 5 American Dynamics Camera Type Minimum Maximum Resolution Resolution MJPEG 320 x 180 1280 x 960 MP4V 320 x 180 CIF The optimal st
94. Data field The NVR will automatically determine the required stream settings Table 9 1 and check if the currently configured streams satisfy those requirements If only one stream is configured and it does not satisfy the requirements for Motion Detection the NVR will attempt to automatically open the second stream with settings best suited for Motion Detection If the camera does not support dual streaming you will manually need to adjust the configuration of the configured stream Motion Detection may not be available on a camera if it s minimum video resolution setting is higher than the maximum acceptable resolution for Motion Detection The NVR will not allow you to configure a camera for Motion Detection if the resolution setting of the camera is higher than the settings in Table 9 1 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Table 9 1 Camera Resolutions for Motion Detection Motion Detection Camera Type Minimum Maximum Resolution Resolution MJPEG QCIF 1280 x 960 MP4V QCIF CIF The optimal stream to perform Motion Detection is 320 x 240 resolution or the closest resolution supported by the camera MJPEG at 7 frames per second Lower resolution or framerates might degrade the quality of Motion Detection The NVR requires at least QCIF and more than 4 frames per second to perform motion detection Procedure 9 1 Enabling Motion Detection for a Camera Step Action Select Cameras from the main men
95. Detection Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Monitor Output Tours Monitor Output Presets Hybrid Email Alerts ALERT CATEGORY Analytics Alerts amp RECIPIENT LIST Camera Malfunction Camera s Not Recording Failed to Read Storage Config Failover Event Motion Detection Alerts Sent without image attachments No Storage Active on Unit Reboot Notification Storage Alerts System Alerts M a a A Tyco International Company WAN Settings will be reset to factory defaults Figure 16 4 WAN Settings After Reset American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Live Video Cameras Storage System Network General LAN Interface DHCP Server gt WAN Settings Dynamic Bandwidth Advanced Hybrid Note Settings linked to the OS will not be affected These include Network Settings Services eg NTP DHCP and so on and the System Settings The NVR License WAN Settings WAN IP Address HTTP Port Secure HTTP Port Streaming Configured Port Allowed Private IP Addresses HE cance e Cameras will be erased leaving the camera list empty will also not be affected A Tyco International Company Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual System Sh
96. ETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED OR STATUTORY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED OR OTHER WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT OR NON MISAPPROPRIATION OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OF A THIRD PARTY CUSTOM TRADE QUIET ENJOYMENT ACCURACY OF INFORMATIONAL CONTENT OR SYSTEM INTEGRATION TYCO MAKES NO WARRANTY THAT ANY PORTION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE FREE OF ANY SECURITY DEFECTS OR IN AN UNINTERRUPTED MANNER TYCO SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROBLEMS CAUSED BY CHANGES IN THE OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS OF THE DEVICE S UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS OPERATING OR FOR PROBLEMS IN THE INTERACTION OF THE SOFTWARE WITH NON TYCO SOFTWARE OR HARDWARE PRODUCTS TYCO NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON PURPORTING TO ACT ON ITS BEHALF TO MODIFY OR TO CHANGE THIS WARRANTY NOR TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR LIABILITY CONCERNING THIS SOFTWARE THE WARRANTY MADE BY TYCO MAY BE VOIDED BY ABUSE OR MISUSE THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER MANDATORY LAW THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE AND COUNTRY TO COUNTRY b Exclusive Remedy Tyco s entire liability and your exclusive remedy under the warranty set forth in this Section 6 will be at Tyco s option to 1 attempt to correct Software errors with efforts Tyco believes suitable to the problem ii replace at no cost the recording medium Software or documentation with functional e
97. Format partition option button Select XFS from the File System dropdown Enter the Mount Point for the media partition for example data1 Select the Fstab Options button Enter rw noatime nodiratime attr2 nobarrier noquota allocsize 4m in the Arbitrary option value field Note nobarrier should only be used on storage devices connected to disk controllers with battery backed cache Click OK End Procedure 3 8 Configuring Media Partitions on the Remaining Media Drives on the NVR Step Action In the Suggested Partioning page of the wizard click Create Partition Setup Select Custom Partitioning for experts The Expert Partitioner page opens To create storage space for media data you are required to create media storage partitions Select the disk on which you want to create the media partition from the system 5 American Dynamics 15 Installing the VideoEdge NVR 10 11 12 13 14 15 view tree This can be either the hard disk on the NVR itself or on separate RAID or FRS storage devices Note Disks may have existing partitions If this is the case they should be removed before reconfiguring a storage device by adding partitions Removing any storage partitions will destroy any existing data Click Add Select either Primary Partition or Extended Partition Note A Primary Partition contains one file system Up to four primary partitions can be created on a single hard drive An Extended
98. HCP soi l m o we Ti eE Cameras wd 2 STORAGE SI v Alarms Storage v Configure v Storage Sets Assign Cameras Email alerts Configure Finish Summary Procedure 3 28 Assign Cameras Settings Step Action Use the checkboxes to select the cameras you wish to calibrate 2 Click Calibrate Calibration will allow the cameras to record for 2 minutes 3 Use the Move to Storage Set dropdown to select the storage set you wish to move the camera to 4 Click Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 29 Email Alerts Settings Note For further information on assigning media folders to storage sets refer to Assigning Cameras to Storage Sets on page 68 End Email Alerts This section describes the email alerts stage of the Setup Wizard 5 American Dynamics 47 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Email Alerts Page The Email Alerts page is used to assign a SMTP server address add recipients to receive email alerts edit the alerts received by each recipient and enable disable alert types Figure 3 26 Email Alerts Page American Dynamics Email Alerts Add Update Alert E J Disable Alerts SMTP Server IP ALERT CATEGORY RECIPIENT LIST ENABLED Analytics Alerts Camera Malfunction Camera s Not Recording Failed to Read Storage Config Failover Event preg Lt Motion Detection Alerts wv DHCP Sent without image attachments Cameras No Storage
99. ICE MEDIA FOLDER gt B FOR MEDIA GB System fdewisdg1 thdisdg1 95 32 GB 95 32 GB Natwon idevisdg3 ihdisdg3 142 98 GB 142 98 GB Advanced idevisdgS thdisdg5 xfs 142 98 GB 142 98 GB Support fdew sdg6 thd sdg6 142 98 GB 142 98 GB fdevisdg thd sdg 142 98 GB 142 98 GB fdevisdgS thd sdg8 142 98 GB 142 98 GB fdevisdg9 thd sdg9 142 98 GB 142 98 GB fdevisdg10 thd sdg10 142 98 GB 142 98 GB fdevisdg11 thd sdg11 142 98 GB 142 98 GB fdevisdg12 thd sdg12 142 98 GB 142 98 GB fdevisdg13 thdisdg13 142 98 GB 142 98 GB fdevisdg14 thd sdg14 142 98 GB 142 98 GB idewisdg15 thd sdg15 142 98 GB 142 98 GB fdevisdh4 thd sdh1 1906 42 GB 1906 42 GB a dewisdi1 thd sdi1 1906 42 GB 1906 42 GB KE K fdevisdj1 thd sdj1 1906 42 GB 1906 42 GB idewisdk1 thd sdk1 1906 42 GB 1906 42 GB 1 E dewisdl1 thd sdl1 1906 42 GB 1906 42 GB a dewisdm1 thdisdm41 990 38 GB 990 38 GB All camera settings are transferred to the NVR 4 2 1 and cameras are assigned to the same storage sets When the wizard is complete the NVR Configuration interface opens All settings configured are available to edit if required End Changing the Disk Boot Order When upgrading NVR systems with large numbers of connected iSCSI disks it is necessary to e
100. KD150 Multiple networks Internet settings This computer View your active networks Connect or disconnect corpdomain net Access type ne Domain network Connections Local Area Connection Unidentified network Access type No Internet access Public network Connections Local Area Connection 2 Change your networking settings Set up a new connection or network Set up a wireless broadband dial up ad hoc or VPN connection or set up a router or access point Connect to a network Connect or reconnect to a wireless wired dial up or VPN network connection Choose homegroup and sharing options See also Access files and printers located on other network computers or change sharing settings Akamai NetSession Interface Control Panel Troubleshoot problems HomeGroup Diagnose and repair network problems or get troubleshooting information Internet Options Windows Firewall 5 Select Properties The Local Area Connection Properties pop up displays 6 Under the Networking tab double click on Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 The Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties pop up displays 250 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Figure 24 8 Local Area Connection Properties H Local Area Connection Properties Networking Sharing Connect using EP Intel R 82566DM 2 Gigabit Network Connection This connection uses the
101. LE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING I THIRD PARTY CLAIMS II LOSS OR DAMAGE TO ANY SYSTEMS RECORDS OR DATA OR LIABILITIES RELATED TO A VIOLATION OF AN INDIVIDUAL S PRIVACY RIGHTS OR II INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL PUNITIVE RELIANCE OR COVER DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS AND LOST SAVINGS IN EACH CASE EVEN IF TYCO HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE AND LIABLE FOR VERIFYING THE SECURITY ACCURACY AND ADEQUACY OF ANY OUTPUT FROM THE SOFTWARE AND FOR ANY RELIANCE THEREON SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR THE LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS SO SOME OF THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY APPLY TO YOU ONLY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY THOSE LAWS 8 GENERAL If any provision of this EULA is found to be unlawful void or for any reason unenforceable then that provision shall be severed from this EULA and shall not affect the validity and enforceability of the remaining provisions You should retain proof of the license fee paid including model number serial number and date of payment and present such proof of payment when seeking service or assistance covered by the warranty set forth in this EULA This EULA is governed by the laws of the State of New York without regards to its conflicts of law principles The parties hereby irrevocably agree that they submit themselves to the personal jurisdiction of the state and federal co
102. Motion Detection Camera Alarm Step Action 1 Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Alarms The Camera Alarm Configuration page opens Figure 9 2 3 Select Edit for the camera alarm you want to edit Lal NAME ENABLED STATUS E Full View co E Half View ce 4 Use the drawing tools to edit the Motion Detection region of interest in the Camera Alarm Configuration drawing window Refer to Table 9 2 for information on how to use the drawing tools 5 Use the Size slider to edit he percentage of the region of interest with activity present for the alarm to be triggered The higher the percentage of the region of interest selected the lower the number of motion detection results triggered for the alarm A setting of 0 will trigger an alarm for any size motion 6 Edit the Duration secs that there is sustained activity in the region of interest before the alarm is triggered You can enter values between 0 default and 600 A value of 0 seconds will trigger an alarm for motion of any duration 7 Edit the Direction by selecting a different direction from the dropdown list The direction is the center of the activity area of motion must move in order to trigger the alarm If you select ANY it will trigger an alarm for movement in any direction 8 Select Save End Disabling a Motion Detection Camera Alarm When a Motion Detection camera alarm is not needed at present but will be needed in the
103. NVR Installation USB drive into a USB port 2 Take screen shots or notes of all pages with custom configurations Backup the 4 1 configuration to a safe location 4 Optional The Dell OptiPlex XE models of the NVR have an internal NIC card fitted to one of the units PCI slots This card should be removed by a competent installer prior to commencing the upgrade Once the card is removed the client network cable should be inserted into NIC1 and the camera network cable inserted into NIC2 on the unit Restart the system The NVR boots from the disk or USB drive and the installation options menu opens Note If the NVR does not boot from the software CD or USB drive you will need to enter the BIOS Manager and Confirm that the 1st Boot Device is CD DVD or Alternative Hard Disk USB Refer to Procedure 3 4 Verify BIOS Configuration on page 11 7 From the installations option menu select NVR Live Installer Note After approximately 20 seconds the installation will automatically start in this mode A Loading Linux Kernel pop up displays followed by a series of boot messages This process may take several minutes When the system has finished booting a desktop opens with three icons the NVR Installation tool the NVR Upgrade tool and Terminal 8 Double click the 4 1 Upgrade Tool icon to launch the upgrade tool Figure 26 2 4 1 Upgrade Tool The Linux Terminal pop up window opens displaying the upgrade wizard Continue to Using the
104. Network Settings Preserve Framerate Any overloaded network or set caps on the NVR client will allow the NVR to adapt the streams accordingly by reducing the bitrate by transcoding a stream to H 264 lower bitrate and possibly lower resolution If all transcode resources are used best effort streaming will occur Procedure 15 17 Selecting Preserve Framerate Step Action 1 Select Network 2 Select Dynamic Bandwidth The Dynamic Bandwidth page opens 3 Click the Preserve Framerate option button The area behind the option buttons changes to yellow indicating a change has been made The Traffic Smoothing fields display The LAN and WAN Bitrate Cap dropdowns display The Transcode Limit Dropdown displays Figure 15 9 Traffic Smoothing WAN and LAN Bitrate Caps and Transcode Limit Traffic Smoothing Client Stream WAN Bitrate Cap LAN Bitrate Cap Transcode Limit 4 To edit the Client and Stream fields select the current values Update the Client and Stream values as required The field backgrounds change to yellow indicating a change has been made 5 The WAN and LAN Bitrate Caps can be set to either a predefined value from the dropdown menus or alternatively a custom value can be entered in the field To use a predefined value open the dropdown select the desired predefined value from the list Or a To use a custom value select Custom from the dropdown The custom entry field displays b To edit t
105. PTZ is not supported is displayed Figure 8 10 PTZ Settings mango_1 American Dynamics AD EIP8H Enable PTZ Enable Return to Home Return To Home After WWA Cancel Enable Disable PTZ Functionality You can enable or disable PTZ functionality for a camera provided the camera has PTZ capabilities Procedure 8 13 Enable or Disable PTZ Step Action 1 Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List Click Setup in the PTZ camera record The Function amp Streams page opens 4 Select PTZ tab Select the Enable PTZ checkbox to enable PTZ Or Deselect the Enable PTZ checkbox to disable PTZ 6 Click Apply End 100 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Configuration Return to Home When the PTZ Return to Home feature is enabled this will return the PTZ to its home position after a defined period of inactivity The first preset in a list of configured presets is considered to be the home position When the PTZ is moved the idle timer for the camera is reset For example if a camera moves to a preset position moves using the pan or tilt controls or moves as part of a tour the idle timer will reset to zero Note If the camera is moved using the camera s own web browser controls the timer will not reset The Return to Home period is defined using the dropdown list The periods available are in seconds between 60 and 600 in 60 second intervals Procedure 8 14 Enabling PTZ
106. Partition is a primary partition that has been divided up into logical partitions as a means of creating more partitions than the four that would otherwise be possible Only one primary partition can be used as an extended partition and it can be created from any of the primary partitions The logical partitions do not need to fill the entire extended partition Enter the required partition size You can select the Maximum Size option to use the remaining disk space or select Custom Size and enter the amount of disk space GB you want to allocate to the partition Or Choose an allocated region on the disk for the partition by entering a Start Cylinder and End Cylinder Note In order to use a disk partition for storage it must meet the minimum storage capacity requirements 10GB Select Next If you are creating an extended partition go to Step 16 otherwise continue to Step 10 Click the Format partition option button Select XFS from the File System dropdown Enter the Mount Point for the media partition for example data media1 Select the Fstab Options button Enter rw noatime nodiratime attr2 nobarrier noquota allocsize 4m in the Arbitrary option value field Note nobarrier should only be used on storage devices connected to disk controllers with battery backed cache Click OK Click Finish Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR 16 Repeat Steps 3 to 15 to create addi
107. Procedure 8 9 Configuring Camera Audio Settings Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu Select List Click Setup in the camera record for which you want to edit audio settings The Function amp Streams page opens 4 Select the Audio Settings Enabled checkbox Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Configuration CODEC VOLUME and BIT RATE drop down lists display 5 Select the required codec from the Codec dropdown list Note 1 Some camera models do not support all of the audio codecs supported by the NVR 6 Select the volume from the Volume dropdown list Note 1 The volume is only available on supported camera models 2 The volume range available is dependant on the camera model 7 Select the bit rate from the Bit Rate dropdown list Note The bit rate is only available to select on supported cameras 8 Click Apply End Configuring Camera Stream Settings Use the camera Stream Settings to define which stream is used for live video alarms and recording The NVR will automatically determine the best stream to use for Motion Detection or Video Intelligence You can also adjust the codec FPS and resolution of each stream Depending on what is assigned to a stream you need to have the appropriate codec FPS and resolution assigned For example the stream you are using for Video Intelligence analytics must be MP4V or MPEG with a recommended resolution of CIF and 7 FPS Note If the
108. R has been assigned a static IP Address Otherwise you could have two different DHCP Servers giving out IP addresses and this could cause network problems 5 American Dynamics 155 Network Settings Figure 15 4 DHCP Server Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company DHCP Server Live Video i This page allows the NVR to host a DHCP server on each network card plugged into the system It can be used to manage the IP a addresses of cameras It can also be configured as a general DHCP server to allocate IP addresses of computers on a private network Storage System Network General TFs FASS se EA E FEE E ETE AA DHCP cannot be enabled on this interface unless the IP address allocation method is set LAN Interface to STATIC on the LAN Interface page gt DHCP Server WAN Settings Dynamic Bandwidth DHCP on eth1 Advanced DHCP Status Hybrid A Tyco Intemational Company Procedure 15 9 Editing the DHCP Server Settings Step Action 156 Select Network Select DHCP Server The DHCP Server settings page opens Select the dropdown arrow next to the LAN Interface you wish to edit Note NICs which have been configured with a DHCP IP Address Allocation will be greyed out and not available to be used to host DHCP Servers A message is also displayed stating DHCP cannot be enabled on this interface unless the IP allocation method is set to STATIC on the LAN Interf
109. _ Routing Name IP Address Ethernet Network Card 192 168 188 41 NetXtreme BCM5721 Gigabit Ethernet PCI Express 192 168 100 42 Ethernet Network Card MAC 00 19 b9 f7 d4 4e BusID 0000 05 00 0 Device Name etho Started automatically at boot e IP address 192 168 188 41 24 de Add Sy edit E Delete Help cancel Select the NIC you want to edit Click Edit Note The available options for editing are sorted under three tabs General Address and Hardware These tabs provide several more options than the NVR Web Interface for more information on the options provided by the General and Hardware tab you should contact your Network Administrator Select the Address tab Select Dynamic Address a From the dropdown select either DHCP DHCP Zeroconf Zero Configuration Networking or Zeroconf b From the dropdown select either DHCP both version 4 and 6 DHCP version 4 only or DHCP version 6 only Dynamic Address f5 DHCP both version 4and6 O Statically assigned DHCP Zeroconf Zeroconf 5 American Dynamics 271 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Or Select Statically assigned IP Address a Enter the IP address in the IP Address field b Enter the Subnet Mask in the Subnet Mask field c Enter the Hostname in the Hostname field Dynamic Address Statically assigned IP Address Hostname IP Address Subnet Mask 9 Click Next 10 To edit another NIC repeat steps
110. a Host ID on page 142 Or To utilize the 60 day trial continue to the next step Optional Apply a Template file a To import a template file click Browse in the Upload a Template file section b Locate the template file and click Open Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR c Click Apply Template Note Using a template file allows you to apply pre configured values to the NVR this is very useful if you want to set up more than one NVR with the same configuration For further information refer to Procedure 17 6 Importing a Template File on page 186 3 Click Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 15 Failover Settings End Failover Page The Failover page is used to enable the NVR to act as a failover server for one or more NVRs on the network Figure 3 11 Failover Page Failover Currently this NVR is not configured as a failover The failover NVR must have a license for at least the same amount of cameras as the NVR with the most cameras licensed that it is monitoring Enable this NVR as a Failover Server Procedure 3 15 Failover Settings Step Action 1 Select Enable this NVR as a Failover Server if required The NVR Failover page opens 2 Configure the Failover settings as required 5 American Dynamics 29 Installing the VideoEdge NVR 3 Select Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 16 System Info
111. a NIC is configured with a static IP address and subnet mask for this reason Or Select STATIC to permanently assign an IP address subnet mask and IP broadcast to the NVR When using Static IP addresses you will be required to enter the IP address subnet mask and IP broadcast in the corresponding fields Refer to Procedure 15 8 Editing the LAN Interface Values on page 154 5 American Dynamics 153 Network Settings 7 Click Save A dialog box displays advising that changing network interface settings may result in your NVR becoming inaccessible 8 Click OK End Procedure 15 7 Disabling NIC s Step Action Select Network Select LAN Interface The LAN Interface page opens N Select the dropdown arrow next to the LAN Interface you wish to edit Select Edit Select the IP Address Allocation dropdown Select NONE When NONE is selected the LAN Interface options for that NIC will collapse leaving only the IP Address Allocation displayed 7 Click Save A dialog box displays advising that changing network interface settings may result in your NVR becoming inaccessible 8 Click OK ao a Aa Q Note If you disable ethO using the NVR Web Interface it will terminate its connection on that NIC To re establish connection you can access the Web Interface using the IP Address of one of the other active NIC s Alternatively you can log into the NVR s Linux OS to edit the network settings refer to Appendix D
112. a re indexing is recommended Reset to Factory Defaults AND Re index Media This will keep all your recorded media and it will also re index the recorded media The media 172 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual System Shutdown and Reset Factory Defaults database will be completely rebuilt during this process Choose this option if the media database has become corrupt and you are unable to playback media Note The re index process is time intensive and can take several hours to complete depending on the volume of recorded data and the storage type local disks or network storage The NVR will not be able to record or display live video until the media re indexing is complete American Dynamics Figure 16 2 Factory Reset Page A Tyco International Company Live Video Cameras Storage System Network Advanced Failover Storage Statistics Logs Dark Image Detection Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Factory Reset Reverts the NVR configuration to the factory defaults The following options are available for the factory restore functionality You can choose to restore with or without preserving your recorded media Reset to Factory Defaults AND Erase All Media This will delete a your recorded media all video audio vaulted media and video analytic data Choose this option if you want to remove all media and fully restore to factory defaults
113. ace page Select Edit To edit the DHCP Status select either the Enable or Disable option buttons When Enabled is selected the DHCP options for that NIC expand To edit the DHCP Start Range and End range type the lowest and highest IP address to be assigned respectively For example if your network addresses were between 10 11 12 50 and 10 11 12 100 you could type 10 11 12 50 for DHCP Range Start and 10 11 12 100 for DHCP Range End Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Network Settings 7 Click Save Note Subnet and Netmask can not be edited in this page The DHCP Start Range and End Range can only be entered when the DHCP Status is set to Enabled End Procedure 15 10 Viewing the DHCP Status Step Action 1 Select Network 2 Select DHCP Server The DHCP Server settings page opens 3 Select the DHCP Status page The DHCP Status page opens Note You can now view all devices being managed by the NVR s DHCP server The information displayed includes the IP addresses in use by the device MAC address for connected devices the time a device was last active and the Hostname for each device End WAN Settings The WAN Settings page allows you to configure the NVR to operate in a wide area network WAN configuration The WAN Settings page lets you specify the name or IP address that can be used to access an NVR located behind a NAT firewall such as a corporate LAN that presents a single publ
114. ame Servers Default Gateway RTSP Port American Dynamics A Tyco International Company WAN Settings WAN IP Address HTTP Port 80 Secure HTTP Port 443 Streaming Configured Port Allowed Private IP Addresses General LAN interface EE Cancel DHCP Server gt WAN Settings Dynamic Bandwidth Advanced Hybrid A Tyco Intemational Company Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Network Settings WAN IP Address Under the WAN Settings you can edit the WAN IP Address Procedure 15 11 Editing the WAN IP Address Step Action 1 Select Network 2 Select WAN Settings The WAN settings page opens 3 To edit the WAN IP Address select the current value Update the WAN IP Address as required The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 Click Save A confirmation message displays End HTTP Port This is the port number used to identify this NVR if more than one NVR is behind the NAT firewall In the HTTP address typed by the user when accessing an NVR a port number can be specified for example http 70 30 22 81 80 Port 80 is normally assumed by default However if two NVRs are behind the same NAT firewall they are both exposed as the same public address so the only way to distinguish between them is by port forwarding rules at the firewall level This means that both NVRs will still listen on port 80 for HTTP requests but that publicl
115. amera view To determine the areas of the camera view that you want monitored you need to draw on the window Use the drawing tools to draw on the Camera Alarm Configuration window The status of each Video Intelligence alarm highlighted in the Status field There are three alarm states e Red Alarm is disabled The alarm can be disabled via the Enabled option button e Yellow Alarm is enabled however the recording mode set for the camera does NOT support alarms so the alarms will not be generated Supported modes are Recording Normal Off Alarm On or Recording Always with Alarm On Green Alarm is enabled and a supported recording mode is selected Alarms will be generated 5 American Dynamics 117 Video Intelligence 118 Figure 10 2 Camera Alarm Configuration WARNING For Motion Meta Data and or Video Intelligence alarms to be enabled the camera must be in one of the alarm recording modes with at least ONE alarm enabled Select Camera EEEO Current Record Status g MORE INFO Discovery Storage Video Intelligence and or Motion Meta Data is not enabled Click HERE to edit camera settings system Network Advanced Hybrid Creating a Video Intelligence Camera Alarm To create a Video Intelligence camera alarm you must have Video Intelligence enabled on the camera refer to Procedure 10 1 Enabling Video Intelligence for a Camera on page 115 Note If
116. an be recorded to Media stored in these folders can include video audio and analytic media You can only have one media folder per storage device partition or storage device depending on your storage configuration You can choose which media folders on devices are to be used for storage Video from the cameras assigned to a particular storage set will record to the media folders on the storage devices that are assigned to the same storage set You can easily create additional storage sets and configure them as required to optimize the disk performance as media can be recorded to storage sets in parallel Each storage set must have at least one assigned media folder for storage You can assign multiple media folders and cameras to a storage set There is no limit to the number of storage sets you can create It is recommended that you assign no more than 32 devices or cameras to a particular storage set For example if a NVR has a 50 camera licence you could have the following storage set options 2 Storage Sets e Storage Set 1 25 CAMs record to first set of drive s Storage Set 2 25 CAMs record to second set of drive s Or e Storage Set 1 32 CAMs record to first set of drive s Storage Set 2 18 CAMs record to second set of drive s 3 Storage Sets e Storage Set 1 10 CAMs record to first set of drive s 5 American Dynamics 225 Appendix A Storage Storage Set 2 20 CAMs record to second set of drive s Stora
117. ange any settings now click Previous You can also manually change these settings later To complete this setup click Finish To save your configuration settings to a template file select the settings to save then click Save to save a template of your NVR NOTE A template file can be used to add to and or update an existing configuration v Roles Network General v LAN Leen 7 Email Settings v Bandwidth Throtting F Failover Settings v DHCP Cameras v Discovery x Configure Alarms Storage v Configure x Storage Sets v Assign Cameras Email alerts Configure Finish Summary Procedure 3 30 Completing the NVR Setup Step Action 1 Select the checkboxes for the template settings you want to save 2 Click Save 3 Select Save As 5 American Dynamics 49 Installing the VideoEdge NVR 4 Navigate to the folder where you want to save the template Enter a File name for the template and click Save Click Finish to complete the Setup Wizard or click Previous to go back Note For further information on templates refer to NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates on page 177 End 50 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Using the NVR Interface Overview The NVR interface allows users to interact with the NVR This provides information about the server and allows you to modify the server s settings The NVR interface is accessible via a we
118. ant to reassign in its existing storage set Select the storage set you want to reassign the camera to from the Move to Storage Set dropdown list The camera is reassigned to the selected storage set End Calibrating Cameras The data transfer rate for a camera is displayed in each storage set table This is recorded in the Estimated Kbps field The data transfer rate displayed in this field usually displays the average rate over the last 24 hour period in kbps You can use the Calibrate camera function to calculate the data transfer rate in kbps for each camera over the last two minutes This will give an up to date data transfer rate for each camera You can use this information to optimize the performance of your NVR by reassigning cameras to storage sets based on the current data transfer rates 5 American Dynamics 69 Configuring Storage Procedure 5 8 Calibrating Cameras Step Action Select Storage from the main menu 2 Select Advanced The Advanced Storage Configuration page opens Figure 5 2 3 Select the Assign Cameras tab A summary of cameras assigned to storage sets are displayed 4 Click Calibrate The Estimated Kbps field for each camera is updated with the data transfer rate for the last two minutes End Deleting Storage Sets 70 You can delete storage sets as required however the default storage set cannot be deleted Note Before you delete a storage set you need to ensure that it contains
119. assword Click Log In On successful login the NVR desktop is displayed kh O N End 24 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR VideoEdge Setup Wizard Once the NVR has been installed you need to configure the NVR settings via the Setup Wizard This can be accessed using the VideoEdge Administrator icon on the NVR desktop or via a remote client On the first time accessing the NVR user interface after installation you will be automatically be directed to the Setup Wizard Note If you exit the Setup Wizard prior to completing all the steps the wizard will save your progress and automatically return to the last page viewed of the Setup Wizard The Welcome page is the first page of the Setup Wizard The purpose of the wizard is to aid you in the final stages of the NVR s installation and configuration On completion your NVR will be operational The Setup Wizard provides the option to configure the following 1 Preparation a Application of a permanent license generation of a Host ID application of a template file this is pre defined settings for the NVR b Enabling the NVR to act as a Failover Server 2 System a Configure the general system information including NVR hostname location current date time b Change the passwords for the two user roles of the NVR 3 Network a Edit the general network settings including domain name domain name servers default gat
120. at will now be used by the NVR to connect to the cameras in this password group Confirm the new password in the Confirm New Password field Select the cameras you want to assign to the password group by dragging the required cameras from the Available Cameras list to the Cameras In this Group List or by using the gt gt and Ez buttons Click Save Note If you are editing the password group for a camera attached by an encoder all cameras connected to the encoder will have the same password Editing the password group for one camera on an encoder will result in all cameras on that encoder being assigned a new password A message opens warning that multiple cameras will be updated End Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Password Groups Delete a Password Group When you delete a password group the NVR will try to communicate with the cameras that were in this group using the manufacturer s default password In order for the NVR to successfully communicate with the cameras that were in this group you must change the password for each camera back to the manufacturers default password using the direct camera web interface or reassign the cameras to a new password group Procedure 12 2 Deleting a Password Group Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Passwords The Passwords page opens Figure 12 1 Select the checkbox in the password group record that you
121. ate and time on an NVR can be manually edited When using an NTP Server the Time will be synchronised with the server Note When using a NTP Server the location is used to define the time and date as NTP servers uses UTC time For further information refer to Network Settings on page 147 Procedure 13 3 Editing the Current Date and Time Step Action 1 Select System from the main menu 2 Select General The System Info page opens 5 American Dynamics 137 Basic System Settings Roles 138 To edit the Current Date and Time select the current value Update the Current Date and time as required enter the date in the field in the following format YYYY MM DD for example 2012 01 01 Or a Select the icon The Calender opens b Select the date from the calender Figure 13 2 System Info Calender June 2012 The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made Enter the time in hours and minutes after the date You can also use the sliders to adjust the time Note Time must be entered in 24 hour format Click Save A confirmation message displays End This section describes actions that can be carried out using the Roles page This page allows you to edit the passwords for each of the two user roles i e admin and operator The admin role is the system administrator role When logged in as the admin you will have access to configure all settings in the NVR interface If you are logge
122. atically logged out in 60 seconds uelp cancel Select to close the Remote Desktop Connection application End VNC Remote Desktop The following procedures will allow you to log on and log off VNC remote desktop A American Dynamics 267 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Procedure 25 5 Logging in to VNC Remote Desktop Step Action 1 Launch your web browser and enter the NVR s IP address into the URL field followed by 5801 For example if your NVR s IP address was 100 100 100 100 enter the address as below http 100 100 100 100 5801 v Note To use the remote desktop function your browser must be Java enabled access is achieved through the TCP port 5801 2 Press Enter The Remote Desktop page opens Figure 25 9 NVR Desktop Login Window VNC e SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 x86_64 techcomms adnvr Username Disconnect cancel fLog In 3 Enter your Username Note If you are planning to change system settings you need to login as the System Administrator root Click Log In Enter your Password Click Log In End 268 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Figure 25 10 NVR Remote Desktop Interface VNC Command Buttons Allows you to disconnect the remote desktop edit the Java interfaces options view items in the clipboard send a Ctrl Alt Del command and refresh the window
123. ating a Motion Detection Camera Alarm Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Alarms The Camera Alarm Configuration page opens Figure 9 2 3 Select the camera for which you want to create an alarm from the Select Camera dropdown list 4 Click Add Note If the Add button is not available you do not have Motion Detection or Video Intelligence enabled on the camera Enable Motion Detection to continue refer to Procedure 9 1 Enabling Motion Detection for a Camera Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Motion Detection 5 If required you can update the Current Record Status For Motion Detection to be enabled you must select either Recording Normal Off Alarm On or Recording Always with Alarm On refer to Table 8 1 Recording Statuses on page 95 for further information 6 Enter an alarm Name max 50 characters Note Use a descriptive name that will make the alarm easy to identify 7 Ensure Motion is the selected Type Note If the Motion is not available in the dropdown list you do not have Motion Detection enabled on the camera instead Video Intelligence is enabled Enable Motion Detection to continue refer to Procedure 9 1 Enabling Motion Detection for a Camera 8 Optional Use the drawing tools to draw the Motion Detection region of interest in the Camera Alarm Configuration drawing window Refer to Table 9 2 for information on how to use the drawing tools Note If you do not draw a
124. ation page opens Figure 5 1 Select EDIT in the media folder record for which you want to assign storage space Enter the amount of storage space you want to reserve for media in this folder in the Amount to Use For Media field Note 1 The Amount to Use for Media entered cannot exceed the total size available 2 Ifthe storage space specified does not meet minimum storage capacity requirements 10GB a warning message displays 5 Click Save End Data Culling When there is not enough space in a storage set to store recorded media media will be deleted 5 American Dynamics 63 Configuring Storage If there is any media older than the maximum retention period specified for a specific camera the media will be automatically deleted The available space in each storage set is determined periodically If the available space in a storage set falls below the data culling threshold media will be deleted for any camera in the storage set which is older than the maximum retention period If you do not set a maximum retention period for a camera all media for this camera may be deleted to free up storage space as the NVR will prioritize saving the media stored for cameras up to their maximum retention period The oldest media is deleted first minute by minute until the free space limit is reached If there is no media older than the retention period the oldest media in the storage set is deleted and an alarm is raised Note T
125. b client or through victor unified client All pages on the web client are static You must refresh your browser to keep all information current To access the web client you must know its IP address and have a User name and Password combination that is valid for the NVR A workstation logging into the NVR using the web interface must have Java 6 or above installed If the workstation is connected to the Internet but does not have Java installed you must download Java from its website http www java com You must also enable javascript on your browser To access the NVR through victor unified client you must add the NVR Recorder to your recorders in the device list in victor client For information on how to add the NVR recorder to victor refer to Setting Up Recorder Devices in the victor Configuration and User Guide This chapter explains how to log into the NVR Server Web Interface access the NVR configuration via victor unified client and provides an overview of the user interface Logging into the NVR Server Web Interface To access the NVR Web Interface you must log in There are two user accounts System Administrator and Operator If you log in using a System Administrator account you will have access to configure and edit all settings of the NVR If you log in using a Operator account you do not have permissions to edit any of the settings you can only view the current settings and view live video Procedure 4 1 Logging into
126. back to their default settings it will however not implement any changes to the servers Linux Operating System During a Reset Factory Defaults function the recorder will not be able to record or display live video until the process is complete Once the Reset Factory Defaults is complete you will have to reconfigure the NVR using the Setup Wizard The following settings will be affected when carrying out a Reset Factory Defaults function Storage settings configured using the NVR web interface will be erased e Failover settings if configured will be erased e User Passwords for all user roles will be reset to the factory defaults refer to Roles on page 138 for more information on default user roles and passwords Alarm settings if configured will be erased e Saved Media files video audio the NVR supports several options for keeping or deleting the Saved Media files they are as follows e Reset to Factory Defaults AND Erase All Media This will delete all your recorded media video audio protected media and video analytic data Choose this option if you want to remove all media and fully restore to factory defaults Reset to Factory Defaults AND Keep Media This will preserve all your recorded media Choose this option for a quick reset of NVR settings but preserve all media and databases Note This option will keep both the media and the current media database If there are continuing issues a reset with full medi
127. ccount A N caution It is extremely important that you will remember this password If necessary you should write this password down and store it securely Re enter the password in the Confirm Password field Click Next 4 If the system does not recognize the password as secure a message opens Click Yes to confirm the use of the weak password and continue or click No to change the password A secure password should contain both upper and lower case letters numbers and special characters Note If the passwords entered into the Password and Confirm Password fields do not match a message opens Re enter the passwords to continue 5 Create an operator user account a Enter the User s Full Name 8 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR b Enter a Username Note A name is suggested depending on the User s Full Name c Enter a Password d Re enter the password in the Confirm Password field e Click Next Note 1 Ifthe system does not recognize the password as secure a message opens Click Yes to confirm the use of the weak password and continue or click No to change the password A secure password should contain both upper and lower case letters numbers and special characters 2 Ifthe passwords entered into the Password and Confirm Password fields do not match a message opens Re enter the passwords to continue Or If you do not want to create an operator user account
128. cess a summary of the errors are displayed End Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates Applying Software Updates You can apply software updates or patches to the NVR using the Update Software page The current version of the software installed is displayed To update the software you must upload a new software package and then install the update Figure 17 5 Update Software Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Update Software Live Video Current Versions Cameras NVR Software 4 241 756 Storage Version 112863 System Camera Pack Version 4 2 1 756 General Roles Upload New Package Licensing Templates Backup Restore gt Update Software Uploaded Packages PTZ Serial Protocols Filename Select Network nvr 4 2 1 744 1 x86_64 rpm 97630 833 08 13 12 10 18 33 nvrDeviceHandlers 4 2 1 744 1 x86_64 rpm 22558 924 08 13 12 10 18 49 Advanced nvrLanguagePack 4 2 1 744 1 x86_64 rpm 8 93 08 13 12 10 18 59 Hybrid A Tyco Intemational Company Procedure 17 7 Update the NVR Step Action Select System from the main menu 2 Select Update Software The Update Software page opens Figure 17 5 Click Browse Select the update or patch file and click Open The name and filepath of the patch file appears in the Upload New Package field 5 Click Upload The uploa
129. ch Editing Camera Settings Step Action kh OO N Select Cameras from the main menu Select List Select the checkbox for each camera you want to edit in batch Click Batch Edit Camera s The Batch Edit page opens Figure 8 2 5 Adjust the camera settings a Name Use this field to update the name of the cameras Note When you update the name of cameras using batch edit each camera will have a number appended to its name For example CameraName_1 CameraName_2 etc b e Maximum Storage Per Camera Select from the dropdown lists to set the maximum duration over which video recorded for these cameras will be saved without being deleted Storage Set Select from the dropdown list which storage set the batch of cameras will record to Recording Mode Use this to set the recording mode for these cameras You can set Recording Off Recording Always Recording Normal Off Alarm On or Recording Always with Alarm On Refer to Recording Statuses on page 95 for more information Analytics Select from the dropdown list which type of analytics to apply to this batch of cameras Refer to Video Intelligence on page 113 and Motion Detection on page 103 for more information 5 American Dynamics 87 Camera Configuration 88 f Audio Select Enabled Disabled from the dropdown list to enable disable audio g Stream Record Modes Set each stream to Live Alarm or Record h Stream Configurations Set the stream
130. d storage needed to support those retention values otherwise 0 0 Total Mbps Current calculated Mbps for this storage set Camera Camera Input number Max Retention Current configured retention period Est Record Rate Kbps Current Kbps over last 24 hour period if less than 24 hours will display N A Est Storage Required GB If a retention period is specified this will indicate the required storage needed to support that retention period Actual Recorded Media GB Actual amount of recorded media for this camera in this storage set Protected Media GB Amount of current protected media for this camera in this storage set Note If a camera has stored media in a storage set but has now been assigned to another or has been deleted the camera number will be displayed followed by This indicates the camera is not currently configured in this storage set The Max Retention Recorded Rate Kbps and Est Storage Required GB will display as Unknown The Actual Recorded Media GB and Protected Media GB will display their values Storage Device Statistics The Devices page contains storage statistics per individual storage device For information on the data provided see Table 18 4 5 American Dynamics 195 Operational Statistics 196 Figure 18 5 Storage Statistics per Device Devices Storage Statistics Per Device STORAGE SET TOTAL SIZE E
131. d in as an operator you will have access to view live video and the current NVR settings but you are not able to make changes Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Basic System Settings Figure 13 3 Roles page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Roles Live Video Cameras User name Password admin a operator System General gt Roles Licensing Templates Backup Restore Update Software PTZ Serial Protocols Network Advanced Hybrid A Tyco International Company Procedure 13 4 Edit a Password Step Action Select System from the main menu 2 Select Roles The Roles page opens 3 Select Edit beside the User name you want to edit the password for The password editing fields display 4 Enter the current password in the Current Password field Note If you are changing from the default password for the admin role enter VIDEO edge23 or for the operator role enter VideoEdge 5 Enter the new password in the New Password field Note It is good practice to choose a password consisting of a combination of upper case letters lower case letters numbers and special characters 6 Confirm the new password by entering it in the Confirm Password text box 5 American Dynamics 139 Basic System Settings 7 Click Save End 140 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Licensing the NVR Overview During the installation and configuration
132. d inputs 128 Total 128 DISCOVERED DEVICE LIST NVR 0 IDs a IPADDRESS MAC ADDRESS NAME INPUT SNAPSHOT a ID amp NAME IP ADDRESS MAC ADDRESS INPUT SNAPSHOT IMPORT TO NVR Procedure 7 5 Adding Cameras using Auto Discovery Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Discovery The Camera Auto Discovery page opens Figure 7 3 3 Select the network from the Select interface dropdown list that you want to discover cameras on 4 Click Discover The Auto Discovery feature searches for cameras on the network which may take a few minutes Cameras that are discovered are displayed in the Discovered Device List Note If there are cameras that you expected to be discovered but are not displayed you may need to add these cameras manually as some manufacturers require cameras to be pre configured 5 Select the checkbox es for the camera s you want to add to the NVR from the Discovered Device List 6 Use the arrow right button gt gt to move the selected cameras to the NVR list Select the checkbox es of the camera s you want to import to the NVR from the NVR list Click Import to NVR The selected camera s are imported into the NVR Cameras List 9 Select List from the Cameras sub menu 5 American Dynamics 83 Camera List The imported camera s are displayed in the Camera List End Removing a Camera You can remove a camera from the NVR if necessary Once you remove a ca
133. d operate the VideoEdge NVR The main sections of this manual and primary functions of the NVR are outlined below including references to the relevant sections in the manual to explain how to set up and use the features System Configurations provides information on the system configurations of the NVR units Refer to System Specifications on page 5 2 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Overview of the VideoEdge NVR Installation provides instructions on how to install the NVR and configure it on the network Refer to Installing the VideoEdge NVR on page 7 NVR Storage provides information about the NVR physical storage of video and instructions on verifying and configuring storage and storage sets Refer to Configuring Storage on page 59 or Appendix A Storage on page 221 Using the NVR Interface provides information on how to access the NVR Configuration Interface via a web browser or via victor unified client and information on how to navigate the interface Refer to Using the NVR Interface on page 51 Camera List provides information on how to add IP cameras to the NVR manually or using Auto Discovery Refer to Live Video on page 73 Camera Configuration provides information on how to configure cameras as individual cameras or as a batch Refer to Camera Configuration on page 85 Motion Detection provides information on how to enable a camera for motion detection and configure motion detection alarms R
134. d which is defined in the Dark Image Detection page The Darkness threshold can be set from 1 darkest to 255 brightest with a default setting of 80 For example with a Darkness threshold setting of 80 a pixel with RGB values of 70 70 70 is considered dark while a pixel with RGB values of 70 70 81 is not considered dark If 90 of all pixels are dark have intensities less than the threshold you have set then a Video Loss alert is activated You can also enable Camera Loss Detection If the camera goes offline a Video Loss alert is triggered In victor client use the Activity Log page or the Reports feature to see if any cameras have generated any Video Loss alert events Figure 21 1 Dark Image Detection Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Dark Image Detection Cameras Note Camera Loss Detection must be enabled to configure Dark Image Detection Live Video St Camera Loss Detection Enabled Disabled orage Dark Image Detection Enabled Disabled System Darkness Threshold ee 100 Network Cancel Advanced Failover Storage Statistics Logs gt Dark Image Detection Email Alerts Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Hybrid A Tyco Intemational Company A American Dynamics 217 Dark Image Detection Enable Dark Image Detection Before Dark Image Detection can be enabled you must enable the Camera Loss Detection option When dark image d
135. ded package is displayed in the Uploaded Packages list 6 Select the new package from the list and click Install End 5 American Dynamics 187 NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates Updating Camera Handler Packs Existing camera handlers can be updated or new camera handler packs installed on the NVR without the need to reload or reboot Camera handlers can be installed using the Update Software page Figure 17 5 The current camera pack version is displayed caution Recording and dry contact processing will be stopped for any camera using a handler that is being updated Procedure 17 8 Updating a Camera Handler Pack Step Action Select System from the main menu 2 Select Update Software The Update Software page opens Figure 17 5 Click Browse Select the camera handler pack and click Open The name and filepath of the pack appears in the Upload New Package field 5 Click Upload The uploaded package is displayed in the Uploaded Packages list 6 Select the new package from the list and click Install End 188 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Operational Statistics Overview This chapter describes how to view recording statistics storage statistics and graphs detailing recording performance and disk activity Recording Performance The Recording Performance page contains a graph displaying the average throughput over time for a selected storage set Figure 18
136. delivery of email notifications sent to email addresses provided by Internet Service Providers ISPs such as Yahoo or Gmail cannot be guaranteed because those ISPs have their own restrictions that may interfere End Setting Up Email Alerts To set up email notifications you are required to build the recipient list and enable the notifications each address on the recipient list is to receive SMTP Server IP Address To allow the Email Alerts functionality with the NVR you must enter the SMTP Server IP address Procedure 20 2 Entering the SMTP Server IP Address Step Action 1 Select Advanced 210 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Email Alerts 2 Select Email Alerts The Email Alerts page opens Click EDIT next to the SMTP Server IP field Enter the SMTP Server IP address in the field Click Save End Building the Recipient List The recipient list is made up of email addresses which will receive email alerts The alerts that each address will receive is defined by the alert category associated with that address and whether or not that category has been enabled Procedure 20 3 Building the Recipient List Step Action Select Advanced 2 Select Email Alerts The Email Alerts page opens 3 Click Add Update Alert Recipient The Add Update Alert Recipient pop up displays Add Update Alert Recipient Use Recipient Email Address w New Recipient Email Address Alert Categ
137. devices and cameras are contained within one storage set By using advanced storage configuration you can create numerous storage sets and assign storage devices and cameras to storage sets as required to optimize disk performance In the Basic storage page all devices are listed In the Advanced storage page you can view all the Overview of Storage Sets A storage set is a group of storage devices One storage set is set up by default on an NVR This is storage set 1 Initially the default storage set has all enabled storage devices their media folders and cameras assigned to it see Figure 5 1 Basic Storage Configuration on page 61 A Media Folder is a location on a device where media can be recorded to Media stored in these folders can include video audio and analytic media You can only have one media folder per storage device You can choose which media folders on devices are to be used for storage Video from the cameras assigned to a particular storage set will record to the media folders on the storage devices that are assigned to the same storage set You can easily create additional storage sets and configure them as required to optimize the disk performance as media can be recorded to storage sets in parallel Each storage set must have at least one assigned media folder for storage You can assign multiple media folders and cameras to a storage set It is recommended that you assign no more than 32 devices or cameras to a particu
138. dware The software only model is distributed on a disk or USB drive The NVR software can be installed on any hardware platform that meets the recommended system specifications System Specifications The hardware platforms that have been tested and qualified as supported systems for hosting the NVR software are detailed in this section The amount of video storage needed depends on site requirements such as the video retention period the number of cameras and the settings for the resolution frame rate codec and quality System Specifications for Bundled Packages The below hardware platforms are available as tested and qualified systems as part of the bundled NVR hardware and software package A American Dynamics 5 System Specifications Table 2 1 Hardware and Software Bundle System Specification Processor Single Intel E2620 Memory 8GB 4 x 2GB modules System Drive Minimum 500GB Hard Drive Video Storage Minimum 500GB Hard Drive RAID Controller PERC H710 Integrated RAID Controller Network Interface Cards Minimum 2 x 1G NICs Keyboard amp Mouse Required for installation and setup only Monitor Required for installation and setup only Operating System None OS will be installed with the VideoEdge Software Recommended System Specifications for Software Only The following hardware platforms have been tested and qualified as supported systems
139. e contactable as https 70 30 22 81 443 while NVR2 is contactable as https 70 30 22 81 100443 The firewall is configured to accept NVR2 requests at https 70 30 22 81 100443 and forward them to https lt NVR2 private IP gt 443 This field must be set in scenarios where multiple NVRs are situated behind the same NAT firewall In this example this field on NVR2 must be set to 10443 Procedure 15 13 Editing the Secure HTTP Port Step Action Select Network 2 Select WAN Settings The WAN settings page opens 3 To edit the Secure HTTP Port select the current value Update the Secure HTTP Port as required The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 Click Save A confirmation message displays Note The default HTTP Port value is 443 End 160 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Network Settings Streaming Configured Port This is the port number used for the real time streaming protocol RTSP connection to this NVR if more than one NVR is behind the NAT firewall when video is being streamed to a client programmatically via RTSP Port 554 is the default port for RTSP connection However if two NVRs are behind the same NAT firewall they are both exposed as the same public address so the only way to distinguish between them is by setting up port forwarding rules at the firewall level This means that both NVRs listen on port 554 for HTTPS requests but that publicly NVR1
140. e CD or USB drive Video of previously archived alarms are not removed during reindex so the archive partition will contain data under a directory called CamFolder instead of CamArchive The CamArchive directory was renamed to CamFolder during the upgrade to 4 2 1 The following items are not recovered during this rollback procedure Alarm sensor configuration e Previous event information Custom users and user roles Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Events Note After the 4 2 1 upgrade has been completed a rollback to version 4 1 will be treated as a system disk crash All of the limitations of a system disk crash recovery will apply Procedure 26 8 NVR 4 1 to 4 2 1 Migration Failure Recovery Step Action 1 Insert the NVR 4 1 software CD into the optical drive 2 Reboot the NVR 3 Boot from the NVR 4 1 software CD or USB drive 4 Ensure that external connections are present 5 Complete the installation process 6 Apply the NVR License 7 Restore the system backup file 8 Reindex media data using the web client http lt NVR IP Address gt admin cgi mediadbReindexer 9 Recover procedure is complete and you can confirm as necessary End 5 American Dynamics 293 Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 294 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual End User License Agreement EULA IMPORTANT READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA
141. e Caps can be set to either a predefined value from the dropdown menus or alternatively a custom value can be entered in the field To use a predefined value open the dropdown select the desired predefined value from the list Or a To use a custom value select Custom from the dropdown The custom entry field displays b To edit the bitrate cap value select the current value Update the bitrate cap value as required 166 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Network Settings The field backgrounds change to yellow indicating a change has been made Note The custom value must be entered in kbps For example to enter a value of 5 5Mbps you would type a value of 5500 6 Click Save Confirmation messages display End Allow Any Throttle Type Any overloaded network or set caps on the NVR client will allow the NVR to adapt the streams accordingly by either transcoding transcoding and framedropping on the transcoded stream and if all the transcode resources are used framedrop will be invoked only If any of the above should fail then best effort streaming will occur Procedure 15 19 Selecting Allow Any Throttle Type Step Action 1 Select Network 2 Select Dynamic Bandwidth The Dynamic Bandwidth page opens 3 Click the Allow any throttle type option button The area behind the option buttons changes to yellow indicating a change has been made The Traffic Smoothing fields display The LAN and WAN B
142. e United States or other countries Any misuse of the trademarks is strictly prohibited and Tyco International Ltd will aggressively enforce its intellectual property rights to the fullest extent of the law including pursuit of criminal prosecution wherever necessary All trademarks not owned by Tyco International Ltd are the property of their respective owners and are used with permission or allowed under applicable laws Product offerings and specifications are subject to change without notice Actual products may vary from photos Not all products include all features Availability varies by region contact your sales representative MPEG 4 Disclaimer This product is licensed under the MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non commercial use of a consumer to i encoding video in compliance with the MPEG 4 visual standard MPEG 4 Video and or ii decoding MPEG 4 video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non commercial activity and or was obtained from a video provider licensed by MPEG LA to provide MPEG 4 video No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use Additional information including that relating to promotional internal and commercial uses and licensing may be obtained from MPEG LA LLC See HTTP WWW MPEGLA COM H 264 Disclaimer This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non commercial use of a consumer to i encode video in c
143. e about your network problems and lead to solutions via procedural information for both Windows XP and Windows 7 However American Dynamics strongly recommends that you do not attempt to solve network problems yourself unless you have training in networking If the Troubleshooting procedures in this Appendix do not solve your networking problems you should contact your Network Administrator for assistance A American Dynamics 245 Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Table 24 1 Network Troubleshooting This problem May be caused by Check or do this Your Client PC cannot access any network device including the NVR Your Client PC may not have an IP address assigned See Assigning an IP Address to a Client PC Your Client PC has an IP address but cannot reach the NVR Your Client PC may not be connected to the network Use the basic tools for checking network connectivity Start by using ipconfig all to determine if networking on your Client PC is configured See Troubleshooting with the IPconfig All Command Your Client PC may not be able to reach the NVR or a network device such as a switch or router Use the ping command to determine whether you can reach the NVR or another known network device such as a router a switch or another Client PC See Troubleshooting with the Ping Command Your Client PC can connect to the network and ping some devices successfully but may not
144. e ene eee eee eee eee 165 Preserve Resolution 0 2 0 eee 166 Allow Any Throttle Type 0 eae 167 System Shutdown and Reset Factory Defaults OVEIVIOW otic a Gabe eda eda oe bed 169 Restart NVR Services 2 6 anase TEENE EEKE eee tee 169 Stop NVR Services 0 0 00 tenes 170 Reboot the NVR 2 ace ee ceaeeeee dee age eee ena e eee ane dbeg oben 171 Shutdown the NVR ecesas siasi renea nna eC a a E A a a eae 171 Reset Factory Defaults saarena erdir eria ti da kane eben eee eaa 172 NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates OVON OW TEs r ena R NETER EER E EEEE ERRIRE E 177 NVR Failover Mode ispa ra Era EEA AR eee eae 177 Configure Failover Mode for an NVR 00 00 cece eae 179 Disable Failover Mode 0 0 cece ene 179 Configuration Backup and Restore 0 c ee eee 180 Create a Configuration Backup File 0 0 0 cece eee 181 Restore an NVR sealses rnan EEEE REET ERESSE eee boas ae eee 182 x VideoEdge NVR 4 2 1 Installtion and User Manual Table of Contents Templates e pesu ie aad eae ned dae ed aed he ae eee db aed wage adh eee 184 Save a Configuration Template 0 0 0 cee eee 185 Import a Template File 2 2 2 2 0000 c ee eee 186 Applying Software Updates 0000 cee ees 187 Updating Camera Handler Packs 0 0 00 eee 188 Operational Statistics OVGIMIOW 3 ace waa hae ea dae Re a a ae et ne ee es 189
145. e same password Use the Passwords feature to define the password group that is to be used by the NVR to communicate with a group of cameras Note 1 The Password feature does not change the password on the camera It determines what password is used by the NVR to communicate with cameras 2 You must change the password on the camera before you change the password for the password group using the Passwords feature otherwise those cameras will not be able to connect to the NVR Create a Password Group If a password has been changed for a camera or a group of cameras the NVR is no longer able to communicate with the camera s You must create a password group containing the new password and assign the camera s with this password to it Procedure 12 1 Creating a Password Group Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Passwords The Passwords page opens Figure 12 1 3 Select Add New Group A American Dynamics 131 Camera Password Groups 132 The Password Group window opens Figure 12 1 Password Group Window Password Group Group Name Description New Password Confirm New Password Cameras Cameras In This Group Dome 192 168 100 168 Camera 11 0 1 1 100 Axis 192 168 100 66 0 1 1 100 Camera 13 0 1 1 100 Camera 1_5 0 1 1 100 Comers 4 0 1 1 100 Save Cancel Enter a Group Name Enter a Description Enter a New Password Note This is the password th
146. e sid aeahe Gad ane eetiad axsemed aay 215 Clearing the Alert Logs Page 2 cece eae 216 5 American Dynamics xi Table of Contents Dark Image Detection COVER VIG W sere ren that oh kat an the an a Ta peek ad hE aaa eth kat ale Se nthe ala cenrtal ae ho t 217 Enable Dark Image Detection 0 00 0 c eee 218 Enable Disable Camera Loss Detection 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 218 Appendix A Storage OVEMVIOW rere caaea daa Pea ae OR iia A Soe Cae eee Bee ey 221 Storage Concepts onic cna itetebehnnodides era deiied deb bite peed beens 221 iSCSI eneee eden ce bipaterscetene ves cute eden a api teeeeanied 221 Fibre Channel esap daa r edie ce eee ea ied ever Sven eeans 221 Direct Attached Storage 0 0 eee eae 222 Storage Typos e rasgia Rae Phase Oae bade tals Pate Gaee hdd eee amp 222 JBOD tees teeters des cake EE ae cs Me erate a ee aha E e a sa anata aca eae 222 RAID onet ada spoed deaa aaia a e es a e ee teu cede eda N Peng 222 Virtual Disks Logical Unit Numbers a nns saana aeaa 223 Storage Strategy croset eri teri Vrea EEE ee eee eee 224 Understanding Storage Sets 0 0 anaana nananana 225 Calculating Storage Requirements 0 000 cece eae 226 Overview of AD Fibre RAID Storage FRS FES 0 0 0 0 eee eee 227 Second generation American Dynamics iSCSI and Fibre RAID Storage 228 Storage Strategy for FRS FES RAID Device 22000000 eee 228 Recommendatio
147. e to the folder where you want to save the template Enter a File name for the template and click Save Note A default template file name is given this is made up of VideoEdgeNVRTemplate followed by the NVR name and the date and time the template was created Example VideoEdgeNVRTemplate ServerName YYYY MM DDT00_00 xml VideoEdgeNVRTemplate linux adnvr 2012 03 26T14_02 xml End Import a Template File You can import NVR configuration settings saved as a template When you are configuring a NVR for the first time you can load a saved template file which will configure the NVR with the settings in the file refer to Procedure 3 14 Configuring the Setup Page on page 28 When applying a template file to an NVR that is already configured the settings on the NVR will update with the settings saved in the template file If there are camera configuration settings in the template to be imported the relevant cameras must be connected to the NVR Procedure 17 6 Importing a Template File Step Action N oO oo f Select System from the main menu Select Templates The Save Template page opens Select the Load Template tab The Load Template page opens Select the Import Template tab Click Browse Navigate to the template file you want to import Select the file and click Open The filepath of the template file appears in the Template File field Click Apply Template Note If any errors occur during the template import pro
148. e verify that all configuration parameters are correct End 5 American Dynamics 277 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting 278 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Overview The NVR 4 2 1 software includes an upgrade package for users currently using the NVR 4 1 software The upgrade process is mainly automated information and instructions are provided as the process runs within Linux Terminal The upgrade process preserves the following of your NVR s files and settings e Media Database e Camera Settings e Alarm Settings e Storage Settings e Network Settings The installation consists of three stages 1 Backup NVR 4 1 applications and OS settings 2 Installation of NVR 4 2 1 software 3 Restoration of NVR 4 1 application and OS settings Should the upgrade fail an error code will be presented to you with details of the log file location This should be supplied to American Dynamics support After a successful upgrade you should create a backup file of your NVR 4 2 1 This can be used to retain your current system settings if you need to perform a system disk recovery in the future Download and Deletion of NVR 4 1 ISO Files ISO data will be preserved during the upgrade process and will consume storage space for future recording It is recommended prior to beginning the upgrade process that you download and delete all ISO data from the NVR 4 1 Procedure 26 1 Download
149. eceived 4 Lost 0x loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds inimum ms Maximum ms Average ms 3 PING the IP address of your Client PC to verify it For example if the IP address is 192 168 0 100 type ping 192 168 0 100 If PING is unsuccessful Request timed out verify your configured IP address settings 5 American Dynamics 257 Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting 4 PING the IP address of the NVR If PING is unsuccessful Request timed out verify the IP address of the NVR Note The default IP address for ethO of the NVR when supplied as a hardware and software bundle is 10 10 10 10 all other NICs will be disabled It is likely that the NVR has been re assigned a new IP address that is in the same network as your Client PC If neither the assigned IP address for the NVR nor the default IP address of the NVR can be successfully pinged your Client PC or the NVR or both are experiencing connectivity problems You should contact your network administrator 5 When using the PING command it also displays how long the packet took to reach its destination This comes in very handy when checking for network latency Note If the delay is too long it may indicate that your attempts to connect to the NVR are timing out even if PING does not time out Contact your network administrator to determine the source of the network delay Figure 24 16 PING Remote Host m C Windows syste
150. ecipient Procedure 20 4 Enabling and Disabling Email Alerts Step Action Select Advanced 2 Select Email Alerts The Email Alerts page opens Select the checkbox for each alert you wish to enable from the Alert Category list Click Enable Alert s 212 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Email Alerts Figure 20 2 Enabling and Disabling Email Notifications ALERT CATEGORY amp RECIPIENT LIST ENABLED example2 tyco com Analytics Alerts Test st JE er cue le A 5 After enabling email alerts an email is sent to the selected recipients when the appropriate alert is triggered End Disabling Email Alerts for a Camera You can disable Email Alerts for a specific camera This allows you to suppress email alerts from cameras which are known to be malfunctioning AN caution This procedure will disable the cameras ability to stream live video Attempting to modify some of the parameters of the camera such as Password Group or PTZ will not be possible when the camera is disabled Procedure 20 5 Disabling Email Alerts for a Camera Step Action 1 Select Cameras 2 Select List The Camera List page opens 3 Click Setup in the camera record of the camera you wish to disable email alerts The Function amp Streams page opens 4 Select the General tab The General page opens Click the Camera Streaming Disable option button Click Apply In the camera record on the Camera List page the IP address ind
151. ecording Schedule 0 0 2 0 cece eee eee 123 Enabling Disabling the Recording Schedule 000222 eee eeaee 126 Editing the Recording Schedule 0 0 0 0 0 0 c cee eae 127 Edit the Group Name 00 ccc cette 127 Edit the Recording Scheduler fora Group 20200 eee ee eee 127 Edit the Cameras Assigned to a Schedule Group 22000000 128 Remove a Schedule Group 0000 cece eee eee 128 Camera Password Groups OVEINIEWS seecae cea e ha ae sd aoe aoe ERR a RENE ee a eRe ae a eS 131 Create a Password Group 000 00 eee 131 Delete a Password Group anaana eet eee 133 Basic System Settings OVENVICW seis chet foes chee a aha eee acane te Lane aim eatate aie ote ail ay dads al Gee ee a TRN 135 General System Information 0 0000 e eee eee eae 135 Hostname sarret ea annaa ao ENa usec e aa i hen aude n aan DE age tee 136 LOCATON serna n anne T aye a I a a eae ay at E aed AS 137 Current Date and Times as diuran uad Pace ale ath hele ee wade a be 137 Roles its cep es ce aac a ce sec A cena DEn a CAS geese Sha ae Ge Sear eo E Oe eas eens 138 Licensing the NVR OVES W aai airaa Chad eee Ol aah eae eee Oe es 141 Licensing the NVR ix faves seta yoda beet eee reese baa eae oo yaa dads 142 Generate a Host ID eiai cy tie nae id he ee a Fee ee he 142 Apply a Software Licence 0 00 0c eee 143 Software Service Agreement Notifications
152. ect the iSCSI RAID Storage device to a switch or directly to NVR LAN3 to ensure that it is accessible Open a web browser 4 Enter the IP address of the iSCSI storage device into the URL field The web configuration interface for the iSCSI storage device opens Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix A Storage 5 Enter the User name Note The default User name is admin 6 Enter the Password Note The default Password is admin 7 Set up the NIC IP settings for the iSCSI port a Select iSCSI Configuration from the iSCSI RAID Rack menu The iSCSI Configuration sub menu items are displayed b Select NIC A summary of all NICs available in the storage device are displayed c Check the values in the Link fields If the value is Up this represents that a cable is present connecting the storage device and the NVR This is the NIC you need to configure d Select the dropdown list in the Name field for the NIC with the Link field value set to Up e Select IP Settings for iSCSI ports from the dropdown list The NIC IP settings page opens f If required edit the Static Address Mask and Gateway Note If there are no DHCP settings available these fields will contain the default values Address 10 10 10 20 Mask 255 255 255 0 and Gateway blank g Click Confirm The NIC settings page closes and the NIC summary details are displayed 8 Create a Node to associate the storage NIC with an NVR port a Select
153. ed Procedure 18 3 Filtering the Disk Activity Graph Step Action Select Advanced from the main menu 2 Select Storage Statistics The Rec Performance page opens 3 Select the Disk Activity tab The Disk Activity statistics page opens Figure 18 3 4 Select the Media Folder you want the graph to display disk activity for from the dropdown Select the required Sampling Rate from the dropdown You can select ranges between 1 minute and 120 minutes 6 Choose the number of hours you want the graph to display disk activity for Select this from the Report for last dropdown 5 American Dynamics 193 Operational Statistics 7 Select the Utilization Scale from the dropdown 8 Select the Disk I O Scale from the dropdown The graph adjusts to display the disk activity as per the filters selected End Storage Statistics The NVR holds and displays storage statistics for storage sets storage devices and cameras that are being used in the NVR storage configuration Storage Set Statistics The Storage Set page contains statistics for the total amount of storage available in each storage set This is the combined storage available from all storage devices assigned to the storage set and does not contain information on individual device statistics The storage set section also contains statistics for each camera assigned to each storage set Further information on the data provided can be found in Table 18 3 Figure 18 4 Stora
154. ed as an appliance Double click the NVR Installer icon to launch the installation tool A Terminal pop up window displays a loading sequence and the Live Installer opens The next stage of the installation process is to configure the NVR s system information settings End Configure the NVR s System Information Settings Using the Installer to configure the system information settings including the NVR language keyboard layout date and time Procedure 3 6 Configuring the NVR System Information Settings Step Action 1 In the Welcome page of the Installer select the required Language from the dropdown 2 Select the Keyboard Layout from the dropdown 3 After reading the licence agreement select the Agree to the Licence Terms checkbox 4 Click Next The Clock and Time Zone page displays Select the Region from the dropdown Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR 6 Select the Time Zone from the dropdown The date and time for the selected time zone is displayed Note 1 If the time and date settings are not correct you can manually update the settings by clicking the Change button and manually entering the current date and time or synchronize with the NTP server 2 For reliable time based playback both the NVR and Client PC need to be configured as clients of the same NTP server 7 Optional Select the Hardware Clock Set To UTC checkbox Note You should only
155. ed distribution means as a tool or utility may be copied and installed without limitation provided that the Software is not distributed or sold and the Software is only used for the intended purpose of the tool or utility and in conjunction with Tyco products All other terms and conditions of this EULA continue to apply 4 EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You agree that you will not export re export or transfer any portion of the Software or any direct product thereof the foregoing collectively referred to as the Restricted Components to IRAN NORTH KOREA SYRIA CUBA and SUDAN including any entities or persons in those countries either directly or indirectly Tyco s Position You also agree that you will not export re export or transfer the Restricted Components to any other countries except in full compliance with all applicable governmental requirements including but not limited to applicable economic sanctions and constraints administered by the U S Treasury Department and applicable export control measures administered by the U S Department of Commerce and U S Department of State any other U S government agencies and measures administered by the European Union or the government agencies of any other countries Any violation by you of the applicable laws or regulations of the U S or any other government or where you breach Tyco s Position notwithstanding whether or not this is contrary to any aforementioned applicable laws or regulations wi
156. eeding to remove and re add the camera If you are adding cameras using auto discovery the cameras will be added to the default storage set 68 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Configuring Storage Procedure 5 7 Reassigning a Camera to a Different Storage Set Step Action Select Storage from the main menu 2 Select Advanced The Advanced Storage Configuration page opens Figure 5 2 3 Select the Assign Cameras tab A summary of cameras assigned to storage sets are displayed Figure 5 3 Assign Cameras Tab American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Assign Cameras Live Video Calibrate Please Note Calibrating the cameras will allow recording to continue for 2 minutes and then calculate the data transfer rate in kilobits per Storage second for each camera over these last two minutes Cameras Oni Denotes record rate for last 2 minutes of recorded media Advanced Default Storage Set 1 Total Mbps 0 00 System RETENTION ESTIMATED MOV ID NAME MODEL PERIOD Kbps Network Axis New Axis210 Max Retention Advanced Camera 1_1 AD Null 1 Max Retention Hybrid Total Mbps 0 00 RETENTION ESTIMATED MOVI NAME MODEL PERIOD Kbps AD Null 1 Max Retention AD Null 1 Max Retention AD Null 1 Max Retention AD Null 1 Max Retention A Tyco International Company Locate the camera you w
157. efer to Motion Detection on page 103 Video Intelligence provides information on how to enable a camera for video intelligence and configure video intelligence alarms Refer to Video Intelligence on page 113 Licensing the NVR provides information on your current license how to licence your NVR how to upgrade your licence and how to configure Software Service Agreement notifications Refer to Licensing the NVR on page 141 Network Settings provides information on the current NVR network settings including LAN WAN Dynamic Bandwidth and DHCP Server settings It also provides information on how to edit the current settings Refer to Network Settings on page 147 Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates provides information on how to configure the NVR as a Failover server create backup and template files and how to configure the NVR using configurations saved in backup and template files This chapter also describes how to install system updates and patches and how to update the camera handler packs Refer to NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates on page 177 5 American Dynamics 3 Overview of the VideoEdge NVR 4 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual System Specifications Overview The VideoEdge NVR 4 2 1 release is available as a hardware and software bundle or as stand alone software The bundled hardware and software is delivered with the software installed on the provided har
158. ely that your Client PC is not communicating with the network correctly Contact your network administrator for more information End Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Troubleshooting with the Ping Command One of the most commonly used tools is the ping command You can use the ping command to check the operation of e Client PC Local Ethernet Connection e Client PC assigned IP address e IP address and your connectivity to the NVR Procedure 24 6 Use of the Ping Command Step Action 1 Open a Windows Command Prompt Refer to Procedure 24 3 Launch Windows Command Prompt Windows XP Or Procedure 24 4 Launch the Windows Command Prompt Windows 7 2 To determine if the Local Area Connection Client PC NICs is working properly type ping 127 0 0 1 You should see the message Reply from for a successful ping or Request has times out if the ping was unsuccessful Figure 24 15 Ping 127 0 0 1 E C Windows system32 cmd exe a Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 76611 Copyright lt c 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C gt ping 127 0 0 1 Pinging 127 0 0 1 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 127 0 0 1 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 128 Reply from 127 0 0 1 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 128 Reply from 127 0 0 1 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 128 Reply from 127 0 0 1 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 128 Ping statistics for 127 0 0 1 Packets Sent 4 R
159. ens Figure 14 1 In the Software Service Agreement section click Edit Contacts The SSA Contacts editing window opens To add a contact enter their email address in the Add Email field Click Add The email address is added to the contacts list Optional To add additional contacts to the contacts list repeat Steps 4 and 5 To remove an email address from the contact list click Remove next to the Email address to be removed The contacts s email address is no longer in the contacts list End Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Licensing the NVR Set the SMTP Server Address You can set your email SMTP server from the licencing page There is one SMTP server assigned to the NVR if you change the server address here it is the same as changing it through the Email Alerts page Procedure 14 5 Setting the SMTP Server Address Step Action 1 Select System from the main menu 2 Select Licensing The Licensing page opens Figure 14 1 3 In the Software Service Agreement section click Set SMTP Server The SMTP Server editing window opens Enter the IP Address into the SMTP Server field Click Submit Note The SMTP Server address is the same as the address entered in the Email Alerts page and therefore can also be changed from here End Send an SSA Test Message When you have configured the SSA settings you can send a test message to the contacts on the SSA contacts list Procedure 14 6
160. eoEdge NVR System Disk Recovery Step Action Power OFF the NVR 2 Optional Replace the system disk This step is required if the system disk becomes corrupt Ensure all external connections are present 4 Boot the NVR from the 4 2 1 Software CD or USB drive Complete the Installation process as far as the VideoEdge Setup Wizard stage Refer to Installing the NVR Software Only Bundle on page 10 for installation instructions 6 Using YaST configure any iSCSI storage devices and connect to them Refer to Procedure 22 3 Connecting NVR to FRS FES Using iSCSI on page 230 7 Unzip the backup file in windows Extract the file VideoOSDetails VideoEdge XXXXXXXX and save to a USB 8 On the NVR open the file VideoOSDetails VideoEdge XXXXXXXX from the USB ina text editor 9 Copy all information from the Filesystem details section of the file 10 Paste the copied text into a new file tmp fstab_backup on the NVR a Open the Terminal window b Type cat gt tmp fstab_backup Press Enter c Paste the copied text from the clipboard Press Enter d Press CTRL D 11 In the Terminal window type videoedge opt americandynamics venvr bin restore_fstab tmp fstab_backup and press Enter Running this command restores all previous mountpoints 12 On the NVR desktop double click on the NVR Administrator icon or on a remote machine use Internet Explorer to log into the NVR Configuration Interface The default credentials a
161. equired End Adding Cameras Using Auto Discovery 82 The camera Auto Discovery feature allows you to automatically discover cameras on the network to add to the NVR When the cameras are discovered you can add as many cameras until you reach your limit of camera licences The default recording status for cameras added via auto discovery is Record Always Note When using camera Auto Discovery it is recommended that the camera network you are using to discover cameras on has a Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 Not all cameras can be added to the NVR in this way as some manufacturers require cameras to be pre configured prior to being added to a network To avoid problems with auto discovery Make sure the NVR is on the network and is online Connect the network cameras to the NVR Power on the network cameras After the cameras have finished their initialization you can use the auto discovery feature 4 Ensure the IP cameras are using the manufacturer s default username and password Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual F American Dynamics 420688 A Tyco International Company E Live Video Cameras List Alarms Scheduler Passwords Discovery Storage System Network Advanced Hybrid Camera List Figure 7 3 Camera Auto Discovery ABOUT Discovery Select interface eth0 10 38 25 183 MESME Available unused licenses 128 Total 128 Available unuse
162. er Manual Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Figure 25 5 Remote Desktop Connection a Remote Desktop 2s Connection Computer Example computer fabrikam com Username None specified The computer name field is blank Enter a full remote computer name Options 5 Enter the NVR s IP Address in the Computer field Select Options The application expands Select Display From the Colors dropdown select High Colour 16 bit Click Connect A warning displays This problem can occur if the remote computer is running a version of Windows that is earlier than Windows Vista or if the remote computer is not configured to support server authentication For assistance contact your network administrator or the owner of the remote computer E Dont ask me again for connections to this computer ee 10 Click Yes The NVR s Desktop Login window opens Log On to techcomms adnyr A SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop Remote desktop Connection Username Password Session GNOME v Cancel 11 Enter the username and password in the corresponding fields 12 Click OK End A American Dynamics 265 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Figure 25 6 NVR Remote Desktop Interface RDP Connection Bar Displays the IP Address of the connected device Allows you to mini mize restore and close the window WV 4 S SS j Computer Button Main Pane This area forms Workspace Tabs Allows yo
163. er the Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 k Enter the Hostname I Click Next m Click OK n Close the Network Settings window Test the network connection between the NVR and the iSCSI storage device a Double click GNOME Terminal on the desktop The Terminal window opens b Type ping followed by the IP address of the storage device for example ping 192 168 8 1 Press Enter Note If the connection is unsuccessful a Destination Host Unreachable message is displayed Check the connections and network settings and retry Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual 12 13 Appendix A Storage c Close the Terminal window Connect the storage device using the iSCSI initiator a Inthe Control Center enter iSCSI into the Filter field b Select iSCSI Initiator The iSCSI Initiator Overview window opens The Discovered Targets tab displays the discovered storage devices At this stage the value in the Connected field is False c Select the Service tab Select the When Booting Service Start option button Click Discovery d e Select the Discovered Targets tab f g Enter the IP Address Note This is the IP Address of the storage device h Enter the Port The default port number is 3260 i Select the No Authentication checkbox j Click Next The iSCSI storage device is listed in the Discovered Targets table k Select the storage device and click Log In Inthe Startup field select Automatic from the dropdown
164. eras from the main menu 2 Select Scheduler The Schedules page opens 3 Click Rename in the group record that you want to rename The group name field becomes editable Enter the new group name Click Save End Edit the Recording Scheduler for a Group Within the recording schedule associated to a group you can update the recording days and times as your needs change The following procedure describes how to edit the recording schedule Procedure 11 4 Editing the Recording Schedule for a Group Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Scheduler The Schedules page opens Select the Schedule Editor tab Select the group you want to edit from the Group ID drop down Edit the recording schedule as required by selecting the day s the recording mode and start and end hours 6 Click Apply 5 American Dynamics 127 Camera Scheduler 7 If further changes are required repeat Steps 5 and 6 End Edit the Cameras Assigned to a Schedule Group You can add or remove cameras to from a schedule group when needed This procedure describes how to edit cameras assigned to a specific schedule group Procedure 11 5 Editing the Cameras Assigned to a Schedule Group Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Scheduler The Schedules page opens Select the Group Editor tab Select the group you want to edit from the dropdown Select the required camera s checkbox es and use the lt lt
165. ess automatically Receives the DNS server address from a DHCP server e Use the following DNS server addresses Allows you to add the DNS server s IP address es by hand Figure 24 9 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties General alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties pop up menu Click OK again to close the Local Area Connection Properties pop up menu Attempt again to communicate to the network from your Client PC For example open your internet browser to see if you can reach a website If you still cannot access the network refer to Troubleshooting Network Connections on page 252 End Troubleshooting Network Connections 252 If you have configured your entire NVR system but do not receive a response from one or more devices you can use some basic network tools to evaluate your connectivity problems There are several commands that you can use from the Windows command prompt to help troubleshoot a network From the DOS command prompt you can use the following commands 1 ipconfig all This command displays the current settings on the client PC s NICs These settings determine how
166. etection occurs a Video Loss alert is activated Both camera loss detection and dark image detection alerts can be viewed in the victor client Activity List or via the Reports feature Procedure 21 1 Enable Dark Image Detection Step Action Select Advanced 2 Select Dark Image Detection The Dark Image Detection page opens To enable Camera Loss Detection click the Enabled option button To enable Dark Image Detection click the Enabled option button The area behind the option buttons changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 5 To edit the Darkness Threshold use the slider to select the Darkness Threshold value The slider color changes to yellow indication a change has been made 6 Click Save Confirmation messages display End Enable Disable Camera Loss Detection 218 When camera loss detection is enabled a video loss alert is triggered when communication is lost between a camera and the NVR When camera loss detection is disabled a video loss alert will not be triggered and the Dark Image Detection feature cannot be enabled Procedure 21 2 Enabling Disabling Camera Loss Detection Step Action 1 Select Advanced 2 Select Dark Image Detection The Dark Image Detection page opens 3 Click the Enabled option button to enable Camera Loss Detection Or Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Dark Image Detection Click the Disabled option button to disable Camera Loss Detection T
167. evice to lock up and cause undesirable results to the NVR Calculating Storage Requirements You need to have enough storage space to fulfil your video recording requirements without data being culled unnecessarily To ensure you do have enough storage it is important to carefully calculate your storage requirements 226 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix A Storage Procedure 22 1 Calculating Storage Requirements Step Action 1 Determine the quantity of Edge Devices and Anticipated Settings Make Model Codec Rez FPS Compress Activity Record Hours 2 Calculate the Data Rate for each device using Vendor Calculators For example AD http www americandynamics net calculators calc_4C_VideoEdge_IP_Encode r html e Axis http www axis com products video design_tool calculator htm e Sony http pro sony com bbsccms ext cat camsec cameraCalc3 HTML NTSC_Calcu lator html 3 Enter the required information into the NVR Storage Requirement Calculator http www americandynamics net calculators Calc_NVR_Storage_Requirement html 4 The calculator output provides the Total Storage for All Cameras and the Total Bandwidth for All Cameras You may need to lower the camera count per NVR to meet network and storage requirements when dealing with many cameras large resolution or retention 5 The maximum cameras per NVR based on current NVR Bundle Server spec e 128 Cameras with a total network bandwidth of 400Mb
168. eway RTSP port NTP status and NTP servers b Edit the LAN settings for each NIC including IP address allocation LAN IP address subnet mask and IP broadcast the MAC address for each NIC can also be viewed c Edit the WAN settings including the WAN IP address HTTP port secure HTTP port streaming configured port d Edit the Dynamic Bandwidth settings including Bandwidth Priority Traffic Smoothing WAN bitrate cap and LAN bitrate cap and Transcode Limit e Edit the DHCP settings for each NIC including DHCP status IP address start range IP address end range subnet and netmask 4 Cameras f Add cameras using Discovery g Add cameras manually h Configure camera alarms 5 Storage a Assign custom percentage of storage as the Vault Media Quota This is the percentage of media storage that is allocated to protected media b Enable advanced storage configuration this allows you to configure custom storage sets assign cameras to specific storage sets and specify maximum retention period per camera 6 Email Alerts 5 American Dynamics 25 Installing the VideoEdge NVR a Assign the SMTP server IP address Add a recipient email address with selectable alert categories including system alerts storage alerts motion detection alerts analytics alerts camera malfunction reboot notification camera s not recording no storage active on unit failed to read storage config and failover event c Enable and test alert catego
169. f the Software including the printed materials 3 OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS Your use of the Software is subject to the following additional limitations Failure to comply with any of these restrictions will result in automatic termination of this EULA and will make available to Tyco other legal remedies a Limitations on Reverse Engineering and Derivative Works You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the Software and any attempt to do so shall immediately terminate this EULA except and only to the extent that such activity may be expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation You may not make any changes or modifications to any portion of the Software or create any derivative works without the written permission of an officer of Tyco except as provided in Section 3 f of this EULA with respect to open source software You may not remove any proprietary notices marks or labels from the Software You shall institute reasonable measures to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this EULA by your personnel and agents b Copyright Notices You must maintain all copyright notices on all copies of the Software c Transfer You may only transfer your rights under this EULA i as part of a permanent sale or transfer of all of the devices for which the Software is licensed as applicable ii if you transfer all of the Software including all component parts the media and printed materials
170. fault static IP address of 10 10 10 10 if DHCP is not available All other NICs of the NVR will be supplied disabled The network settings for the NVR are configured using the Setup Wizard NVR Software Only Bundle When the NVR is supplied as a software only bundle it requires full installation onto your hardware You should ensure your hardware matches the minimum operation requirements refer to System Specifications on page 5 Installing the NVR Hardware and Software Bundle This section details the installation and configuration process for an NVR hardware and software bundle The installation and configuration process consists of 1 Initial boot up of the NVR 2 Setting up NVR OS User Accounts 3 Logging into the NVR desktop 4 Configuring the NVR using the Setup Wizard A American Dynamics 7 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Initial Boot Up of the NVR Procedure 3 1 Powering up the NVR for the First Time Step Action 1 Power up the NVR A series of boot messages appear and the system is loaded to the Licence Agreement 2 When the licence agreement is displayed select Yes Agree to the Licence Agreement 3 Click Next Set the Password for the Root User account page displays The next stage of installation process is to create user accounts End Procedure 3 2 Setting Up NVR OS User Accounts Step Action 1 In the Password field in the Root User account page of the Installer enter a password for the root user a
171. figuration is performed using Linux YaST Partitioner If you want to use the XFS file system for maximum throughput additional file system options need to be configured For Internal devices you need to configure rw noatime nodiratime attr2 nobarrier noquota allocsize 4m For external devices including iSCSI and Fibre Optic you need to configure nofail rw noatime nodiratime attr2 nobarrier noquota allocsize 4m Note nobarrier should only be used on storage devices connected to disk controllers with battery backed cache 224 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix A Storage Understanding Storage Sets The NVR uses a feature called Storage Sets These are groups of storage devices and cameras By default the NVR has one storage set Storage Set 1 Initially the default storage set has all detected storage devices their media folders and cameras assigned to it Figure 22 3 Default Storage Set Live Video Cameras Peete Vault Media Quota of total storage 5 gt Basic AS aaa DEVICE USEFOR WEDIA FOLDER STORAGE iin Basic storage a a Bea Eca T configuration i j idevisdet e Jdata2 ki 1 Storage Set Idevisdd1 data3 Network Hybrid Idevisde1 datas idevisdf1 idataS idevisda data J bos2nfs02 americas tsp ad export releases Jreleases A Tyco Intemational Company A Media Folder is a location on a device where media c
172. for your site Refer to Getting Started with VideoEdge NVR on page 2 for more information on using the NVR You use the NVR Web Interface to configure and manage the NVR via a web browser You can use these web pages to configure the NVR and its storage cameras and devices Typically the assets connected to the NVR are configured on a local TCP IP network isolated from the larger network and accessible to clients via the NVR and the victor site manager Refer to Using the NVR Interface on page 51 for more information on using the NVR software The victor site manager provides a single point of access for users to manage multiple NVRs The victor site manager utilizes SQL Server s database functionality to provide authentication for VideoEdge Clients as well as central monitoring and administration of multiple recording platforms over a Wide Area Network WAN Refer to the victor Configuration and User Guide for more information on configuring and using the victor site manager software The victor clients are used to monitor and configure one or more NVRs or other devices that are connected to the victor site manager network The victor client enables a user to login and access multiple NVRs from a single Graphical User Interface GUI Refer to the Configuration and User Guide more information on using the victor client software Getting Started with VideoEdge NVR This manual provides you with the information you need to install configure an
173. future the alarm can be disabled The alarm configuration remains the same on the camera for when it is enabled again 110 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Motion Detection Procedure 9 5 Disabling a Camera Alarm Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu N Select Alarms The Camera Alarm Configuration page opens Figure 9 2 Select the alarm record you want to disable Click Edit Select the No option button in the Enabled field Click Save ao a Aa Q End Deleting a Motion Detection Camera Alarm When a Motion Detection camera alarm is no longer required it can be deleted Procedure 9 6 Deleting a Camera Alarm Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Alarms The Camera Alarm Configuration page opens Figure 9 2 Select the alarm record you want to delete Click Delete The alarm record is removed from the alarm table End 5 American Dynamics 111 Motion Detection 112 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Video Intelligence Overview The NVR provides server based Video Intelligence for all cameras Video Intelligence is a licenced add on for the NVR Hardware based camera based Video Intelligence is not supported by the NVR The NVR supports two Video Intelligence features e Video Intelligence Search a victor client can search recorded video for a specific type of event Refer to the victor Configuration and User Guide for furt
174. g documentation or in the absence of such solely in the manner contemplated by the nature of the Software Remotely Stored Components The Software may also include a software code component for operating one or more devices remotely You may install and or use one copy of such component of the Software on a remote storage device on an internal network with all of the devices and may operate such component with each device over the internal network solely in the manner set forth in any accompanying documentation or in the absence of such solely in the manner contemplated by the nature of the Software provided however you must still acquire the required number of licenses for each of the devices with which such component is to be operated d Embedded Software Firmware The Software may also include a software code component that is resident in a device as provided by Tyco for operating that device You may use such component of the Software solely in connection with the use of that device but may not retrieve copy or otherwise transfer that software component to any other media or device without Tyco s express prior written authorization e Backup Copy You may make a back up copy of the Software other than embedded software solely for archival purposes which copy may only be used to replace a component of the Software for which you have current valid license Except as expressly provided in this EULA you may not otherwise make copies o
175. ge Set 3 20 CAMs record to third set of drive s Or e Storage Set 1 16 CAMs record to first set of drive s Storage Set 2 17 CAMs record to second set of drive s Storage Set 3 17 CAMs record to third set of drive s Note 1 The lower number of cameras per storage set the higher achievable throughput This is due to a lower total data rate required to record to each storage device 2 High bit rate cameras e g megapixel should be spread across storage sets for load balancing Figure 22 4 Multiple Storage Sets American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Storage Sets Add Storage Set Default Storage Set 1 Available Space 5584 74 GB Live Video Cameras Storage TOTAL AMOUNT TOUSE MOVE TO Basic si DEVICE MEDIA FOLDER TYPE SIZE GB FOR MEDIA GB STORAGE SET Advanced T Imedia disk5 1861 58 GB 1861 58 GB Imediajdis2 1861 58 GB 1861 58 GB Advanced Network E iewer meninas 1861 58 6B 1861 58 6B i storage Advanced Available Space 3723 16 GB co nfig ura ti on System ae Sogn REE me BONS TOM Multiple Storge Idevisdf1 xis 1861 58 GB 1861 58 GB Idevisdd1 xfs 1861 58 GB 1861 58 GB A Tyco Intemational Company caution Avoid assigning Virtual Disks from the same Disk Group to different storage sets If this is done there is a high probability that continuous disk thrashing will cause the storage d
176. ge Statistics Page Storage Sets NOTE The following statistics represent recorded media sampled over the last 24 hours may not reflect current activity N A not enough media available or NO retention period specified Storage Set 1 Total Configured Amount GB 1770 42 Total Recorded Media GB 1595 44 Total Protected Media GB 0 0 Available Disk Space GB 89 79 Total Est Required Storage GB 0 0 Total Mbps 7 55 EST RECORDED S A ACTUAL RECORDED MEDIA PROTECTED MEDIA CAMERA MAX RETENTION z RATE Kbps i GB GB 1 Max retention NA 0 2 Max retention 1929 00 0 00 3 Max retention 1941 00 0 00 Max retention 1932 00 i 0 00 Max retention 1923 00 0 00 Max retention NA Max retention NA Max retention NIA Max retention 8 00 194 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Operational Statistics Table 18 3 Storage Set Statistics Field Description Storage Total Configured Amount GB Total configured amount of storage that will be used in this storage set Total Recorded Media GB Current total amount of recorded media in this storage set Total Protected Media GB Current total amount of protected media in this storage set Available Disk Space GB Total available disk space in this storage set Total Est Required Storage If a retention period is defined on any GB camera this will show the total require
177. ging the cursor over the camera view to highlight the area of interest The detection area is highlighted in yellow when the mouse button is released A American Dynamics 107 Motion Detection 108 Tool Type Options Description Brush Size 4x4 You can choose the brush size when using free draw to draw a region of interest for Video Intelligence alarms Select 4 x4 to draw using a thin line Note This option is not available when configuring Motion Detection alarms 8x8 You can choose the brush size when using free draw to draw a region of interest for Video Intelligence alarms Select 8 x 8 to draw using a thick line Note This option is not available when configuring Motion Detection alarms Draw Mode Draw Select Draw when you want the draw style to draw a detection area Erase Select Erase when you want the draw style to erase sections of a detection area Creating a Motion Detection Camera Alarm When creating Motion Detection camera alarm you must define an alarm rule When activity in a camera s view or region of interest satisfies the criteria defined in the rule an alarm is triggered To create a Motion Detection camera alarm you must have Motion Detection enabled on the camera Procedure 9 1 Enabling Motion Detection for a Camera If you try to add a camera alarm without Motion Detection enabled you will be prompted to edit the camera settings Procedure 9 3 Cre
178. gs media database alarms storage settings and network settings Procedure 26 6 Completing the Upgrade Step Action 1 A progress bar will display the percentage completion of the restoration process 288 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Figure 26 13 Restoration Progress Bar Terminal File Edit View Terminal Help NVR 4 1 to 4 2 Upgrade Stage 1 of 4 Restoring 4 1 postgres Database Status Restoring 4 1 postgresql to standard SLES location 2 Once the restoration is complete press the Return key Terminal displays Installation complete Reboot now Y n Figure 26 14 Installation Complete Reboot Now Terminal File Edit View Terminal Help extension RANDR missing on display 1 1 extension XFree86 Misc missing on display extension XFree86 Misc missing on display extension XFree86 Misc missing on display extension XFree86 Misc missing on display could not import file var cache sax files config at usr sbin isax line could not import file var cache sax files config at usr sbin isax line could not import file var cache sax files config at usr sbin isax line could not import file var cache sax files config at usr sbin isax line could not import file var cache sax files config at usr sbin isax line could not import file var cache sax files config at usr sbin isax line could not import file var cache sax fi
179. gs are not correct you can manually update the settings by clicking the Change button and manually entering the current date and time or synchronize with the NTP server 5 American Dynamics 285 Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 8 Optional Select the Hardware Clock Set To UTC checkbox Note You should only select this checkbox if the systems hardware clock is set to UTC Figure 26 9 Clock and Time Zone Page Clock and Time Zone YaST a Clock and Time Zone To select the time zone to use in your system first select the Region more Installation v Welcome gt Time Zone Disk e Installation Settings e Perform Installation Configuration e Automatic Configuration License Agreement Administrative Password e Optional User Region Time Zone Europe e United Kingdom Date and Time 2012 05 24 16 21 14 change O Hardware Clock Set To UTC Abort Back B Next 9 Click Next The Suggested Partitioning page opens 10 Click the Import Partition Setup button A popup window opens It is highly recommended at this point you identify the boot disk This is the disk containing the partitions swap and var In the example below the imported partitions belong to disk dev sdb1 Take note of the boot disk in your case depending on your system you may need this information during the Installation Settings phase 11 Click the Import button cautio
180. he NVR Interface Live Video Menu The Live Video menu item is only available through the NVR server web interface This section has sub menus 1 Camera View and 2x2 Camera View The Camera View pages allow you to view either 1 camera or up to 4 cameras simultaneously that are connected to the NVR From here you can also edit configuration settings for the selected camera Cameras Menu The Cameras menu has sub menu items List Alarms Scheduler Passwords and Discovery List From here you can view a list of all cameras connected to the NVR and view a summary of their configuration status You can add and remove cameras or edit batch edit cameras configuration settings Alarms You can create camera alarms these may be for specific regions of a cameras view You can also select different types of alarm trigger for example Motion Detection or Video Intelligence Schedules The scheduler allows you to specify the recording mode including no recording that is active at scheduled times during the day Passwords The passwords page allows you to create and maintain camera password groups Discovery This section allows you to use auto discovery to add cameras to the NVR Storage Menu The Storage menu has sub menu items Basic and Advanced Use the Basic storage configuration option to assign devices available on the NVR as storage devices edit media folder settings of storage devices and to allocate a vault media quota Use
181. he area behind the option buttons changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 Click Save A confirmation message displays End 5 American Dynamics 219 Dark Image Detection 220 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix A Storage Overview NVRs can require a tremendous amount of storage space depending on the number of cameras codec resolution frame rates recording modes and the duration for which you want to preserve video recordings At the outset of your use of the NVR system you will need to have storage configured to record media data captured by video devices cameras or encoders connected to your NVRs From time to time you may find it necessary to replace or add a storage device to produce a greater capacity for video storage This section provides instructions for connecting NVRs to Fibre and iSCSI RAID devices then using them with the NVR It is assumed that the storage device s Disk Groups RAID set and Virtual Disks LUNs have been properly configured and the device has been physically connected to the NVR Use the operating system to mount any local storage device or any network storage device to the NVR Storage Concepts iSCSI e This standard is used to transmit data over local area networks LANs wide area networks WANs and can enable location independent data storage and retrieval A system that uses iSCSI requires an initiator Initiators are iSCSI clients and
182. he bitrate cap value select the current value Update the bitrate cap value as required The field backgrounds change to yellow indicating a change has been made Note The custom value must be entered in kbps For example to enter a value of 5 5Mbps you would type a value of 5500 5 American Dynamics 165 Network Settings 6 From the Transcode Limit dropdown select the number of streams desired 7 Click Save Confirmation messages display End Preserve Resolution Any overloaded network or set caps on the NVR client will allow the NVR to adapt the streams accordingly by reducing the stream output using framedrop If framedrop should fail or doesn t occur then best effort streaming will occur Procedure 15 18 Selecting Preserve Resolution Step Action 1 Select Network 2 Select Dynamic Bandwidth The Dynamic Bandwidth page opens 3 Click the Preserve Resolution option button The area behind the option buttons changes to yellow indicating a change has been made The Traffic Smoothing fields display The LAN and WAN Bitrate Cap dropdowns display Figure 15 10 Traffic Smoothing LAN and WAN Bitrate Caps Traffic Smoothing Client Stream WAN Bitrate Cap LAN Bitrate Cap 4 To edit the Client and Stream fields select the current values Update the Client and Stream values as required The field backgrounds change to yellow indicating a change has been made 5 The WAN and LAN Bitrat
183. he demonstration or evaluation period k Registration of Software The Software may require registration with Tyco prior to use If you do not register the Software this EULA is automatically terminated and you may not use the Software L Additional Restrictions The Software may be subject to additional restrictions and conditions on use as specified in the documentation accompanying such Software which additional restrictions and conditions are hereby incorporated into and made a part of this EULA AS American Dynamics 297 End User License Agreement EULA 298 m Upgrades and Updates To the extent Tyco makes them available Software upgrades and updates may only be used to replace all or part of the original Software that you are licensed to use Software upgrades and updates do not increase the number of copies licensed to you If the Software is an upgrade of a component of a package of Software programs that you licensed as a single product the Software may be used and transferred only as part of that single product package and may not be separated for use on more than one computer or System Software upgrades and updates downloaded free of charge via a Tyco authorized World Wide Web or FTP site may be used to upgrade multiple Systems provided that you are licensed to use the original Software on those Systems n Tools and Utilities Software distributed via a Tyco authorized World Wide Web or FTP site or similar Tyco authoriz
184. he media deleted will only be the oldest media available online The alarm is an indication that there is insufficient storage space available for the media that you want to store To resolve this issue you can add additional storage devices to the NVR decrease the maximum retention period for camera s or use Advanced Storage Configuration settings to move cameras to another storage set To add additional media storage refer to Connecting Additional Storage Devices on page 228 Vaulted Media 64 Vaulted media is specific media tagged so it will not be deleted until specified Vaulted media will not be deleted as part of the normal data culling process of media storage folders Use victor unified client to tag media as protected media using the Vault feature You must have Protect permissions to set video as protected media To allow vaulted media to be deleted you must set it as unprotected using victor unified client and have Unprotect permissions For more information refer to the Vault chapter in the victor Configuration and User Guide Vault Media Quota A vault media quota is a percentage of the total storage available that is to be used to store vaulted media only Over time the amount of vaulted media within a storage set will accumulate If too much vaulted media accumulates it may result in non vaulted media being prematurely culled when the storage space reaches its maximum capacity A vault media quota can be set to p
185. he operating system is set to be installed on partitions dev sbd1 dev sdb2 and dev sdb3 The boot loader will be installed on to the Master Boot Record MBR of dev sdb 20 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR Figure 3 6 Live Installation Settings Live Installation Settings Click any headline to make changes or use the Change menu below System System innotek GmbH VirtualBox 1 2 Processor Intel R Core TM 2 Duo CPU E8400 3 00GHz Main Memory 1 GB Partitioning Delete partition dev sdb1 14 91 GB Delete partition dev sdb2 14 91 GB Delete partition jdev sdb3 7 45 GB Create swap volume dev sdb1 14 91 G8 Create volume dev sdb2 18 63 GB for var wth xfs Create root volume devisdb3 7 45 G8 with ext3 Booting Boot Loader Type GRUB Location devisdb MBR Sections SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 default Failsafe SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 Order of Hard Disks devisdb dev sda Change v hep Back Qor off install mi Computer Terminal termnal amp yest m Fi sep 14 3 21 Pm gg SOZIO Hrm 11 Click Install Note Installation may take up to ten minutes depending on computer server hardware 12 Continue to System Reboot After Basic Installation End System Reboot After Basic Installation After basic installation is complete the NVR must be restarted to progress to the next s
186. her information on Video Intelligence searches e Video Intelligence Alerts you can define Video Intelligence settings that can be used to set up Video Intelligence rules There are several types of Video Intelligence rules available These include e Object Detection Used to detect people or objects moving into a region of interest This search is similar to a motion search but only detects people or objects on entry of the region of interest i e they will not be continuously detected if they remain within the region of interest If the object leaves the camera view and returns the search will detect them again A separate event is generated for each object that enters the region even if the objects move into the region at the same time unlike motion detection that generates one event e Object Direction Used to detect objects moving in a certain direction through a region of interest for example a car travelling the wrong way on a road Object Linger Used to detect objects lingering in an area of interest An object is lingering if it is mostly stationary Object Enter Used to detect objects entering a camera view through a region of interest for example a doorway or threshold e Object Exit Used to detect objects exiting a camera view through a region of interest for example a doorway or threshold e Object Abandoned Removed Used to find changes to the background of a scene in a region of interest for exa
187. ic Smoothing fields display Traffic Smoothing reduces the appearance of framedrop on the LAN client by smoothing traffic from the NVR Traffic Smoothing can be configured for both the client and the stream it is entered in Mbps and its default values for each of the four predefined bandwidth priorities will appear as 300 Mbps for the client and 75 Mbps for the stream these figures can be edited to match the capabilities of your network and your client host client NIC and performance as this feature addresses issues with poor performance network cards on victor client When Preserve Framerate Preserve Resolution and Allow any throttle type are selected the WAN and LAN bitrate cap dropdowns display Note A bitrate cap limits the amount of streaming data i e video leaving the NVR to remote clients or clients connected using VPN The WAN bitrate cap cannot exceed the LAN bitrate cap 5 American Dynamics 163 Network Settings The dropdown menus provide a list of predefined values which you can choose from Alternatively a custom value can be entered and there is no minimum entry value This allows experienced users to customise their WAN and LAN Bitrate Caps to best utilise their networks capabilities Note If the LAN or WAN bitrate cap is set to a value which is less than the Traffic Smoothing value Traffic Smoothing will have no affect on the transmitted stream as it will adhere primarily to the bitrate cap It is recommended that T
188. ic address for connections from outside the LAN You can also specify the ports that are used for HTTP secure HTTP and streaming RTSP connections to the NVR You can also enter a list of allowed IP addresses In addition the General Settings page allows you to change the RTSP Streaming Port refer to Procedure 15 3 Editing the RTSP Port on page 150 Note For a new install the Setup WAN fields display the default values If you upgrade the NVR these fields will display the previously assigned values however if you carry out an appliance install the values will be lost unless a template has been created and applied refer to NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates on page 177 If you enter a value into any of these fields that value is saved and is displayed until modified 5 American Dynamics 157 Network Settings 158 Figure 15 5 WAN Port Mapping Exam WAN Settings WAN IP Address HTTP Port 10443 gt 10 10 10 1 443 10554 gt 10 10 10 1 554 eo Secure HTTP Port 443 Streaming Configured Port 554 Cancel NAT Firewall IP Address 75 25 43 2 Port Forwarding Rules 10080 gt 10 10 10 1 80 m http 75 25 43 2 10080 https 75 25 43 2 10443 rtsp 75 25 43 2 10554 To port 554 NVR1 IP Address 10 10 10 1 HTTP listening on port 80 HTTPS listening on port 443 RTSP listening on port 554 Network General Domain Name Domain N
189. icates DISABLED End 5 American Dynamics 213 Email Alerts Procedure 20 6 Re enabling Email Alerts for a Camera Step Action Select Cameras Select List The Camera List page opens Click Setup in the camera record of the camera you wish to re enable email alerts The Function amp Streams page opens Select the General tab The General page opens Click the Camera Streaming Enable option button Click Apply In the camera record on the Camera List page the IP address no longer indicates DISABLED End Removing an Address from the Recipient List You can remove recipient addresses from each alert category Procedure 20 7 Remove an Address from the Recipient List Step Action 1 Select Advanced 1 Select Email Alerts The Email Alerts page opens Scroll to the Alert Category you wish to remove a recipients address from Select Edit 4 Select the checkbox next to the address you wish to remove 214 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Email Alerts Figure 20 3 Deleting Email Addresses from a Recipient List M ALERT CATEGORY amp RECIPIENT LIST ENABLED 7 example2 tyco com Se SAVE Analytics Alerts pa Fils Oves No exampleS tyco com CANCEL 5 Select Save The page refreshes and the address is removed from the recipient list End Alert Logs The Alert Logs page displays a list of email alerts which have been sent by the NVR Each entry
190. ield Enter the subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field Select the desired NIC from the NIC dropdown Click Save NOAR End Dynamic Bandwidth In the Dynamic Bandwidth page you can edit the Bandwidth throttling by default the Bandwidth throttling is disabled no framedropping or transcoding are invoked Editing Bandwidth Throttling changes the type of throttling which is utilized during streaming of video The options available for configuration on the page vary with the Bandwidth Priority which is selected Options will only display for editing if they are applicable to that Bandwidth Priority 162 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Network Settings Figure 15 7 Dynamic Bandwidth Page Ss Dynamic Bandwidth Live Video Bandwidth Priority Disable Throttle Traffic Smoothing Only Preserve Framerate Cameras Storage Preserve Resolution Allow any throttle type System Network General LAN Interface DHCP Server WAN Settings gt Dynamic Bandwidth Advanced Hybrid 4 1 A Tyco Intemational Company Bandwidth Priority Bandwidth Priority allows you to select the type of throttling you wish to attempt to use You can chose to disable throttling or use one of the four predefined throttling options Traffic Smoothing Only Preserve Framerate Preserve Resolution and Allow any throttle type When any of the four predefined throttling types are selected the Traff
191. iguration and is displayed in the Advanced Configuration page in Storage Set 1 Table 5 2 describes the fields in the Advanced Storage Configuration storage sets 5 American Dynamics 65 Configuring Storage 66 American Dynamics A Tyco Live Video Cameras Storage Basic Advanced System Network Advanced Hybrid International Company Storage Sets Figure 5 2 Advanced Storage Configuration Add Storage Set Default Storage Set 1 Available Space 5584 74 GB DEVICE MEDIA FOLDER TYPE idevisde1 media disk5 1861 58 GB 1861 58 GB TOTAL SIZE GB devisdb1 media disk2 1861 58 GB 1861 58 GB sdevisdct imedia disk3 1861 58 GB 1861 58 GB Storage Set 2 Available Space 3723 16 GB DEVICE MEDIA FOLDER TYPE idevisdf1 Imedia disk6 1861 58 GB 1861 58 GB AMOUNT TOUSE MOVE TO FOR MEDIA GB STORAGE SET idevisdd1 media disk4 1861 58 GB 1861 58 GB A Tyco Intemational Company Table 5 2 Advanced Storage Configuration Fields Field Description Set This is the Storage Set the media folder is assigned to Device This is a physical device detected by the NVR Media Folder The location on the device where recorded media will be stored Type Indicates the file system type for example XFS Total Size GB The total size of the storage device in GB
192. il the wizard has been completed Figure 3 8 VideoEdge Administrator Icon VE Vidaozdes ameneron 2 You will be prompted to enter a Username and Password Enter the following credentials Username admin Password VIDEO edge23 26 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR 3 Click OK The wizard s Welcome page opens End Preparation This section describes the preparation stage of the Setup Wizard including the Welcome Setup and Failover pages Welcome Page The Welcome page is the first page of the Setup Wizard to advance to the next page click Start Figure 3 9 Welcome Page Welcome to the NVR Setup Wizard If you are connecting to your NVR for the first time this wizard will guide you step by step through the required installation steps to getting your NVR up and running LAN WAN Bandwidth Throttling DHCP Cameras Discovery Configure Alarms Storage Configure Email alerts Configure Finish Summary Setup Page The Setup page provides an interface to apply a licence or generate a host ID there also is the option to apply template settings The host ID is required for upgrade and new installations 5 American Dynamics 27 Installing the VideoEdge NVR 28 Preparation v Welcome Setup Failover System General Roles Network General LAN WAN Bandwidth Throttling DHCP Cameras Di
193. ing NVR 4 1 ISO Files Step Action 1 Select Video A American Dynamics 279 Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 2 Select ISO Files 3 Each ISO file is listed with its relevant data Figure 26 1 ISO Files ISO files created from searches Unknown Camera 3 Jun 21 2011 16 17 58 GMT 0400 Jun 21 2011 16 22 58 GMT 0400 58 MB Download Delete Unknown Camera 1 Camera2 Camera 2 MD5 Sum 13af91b5d7b90f6e04eca521a7ad6er Unknown Camera 1 Jun 27 2011 16 26 22 GMT 0400 Jun 27 2011 16 26 52 GMT 0400 8 MB Download Delete Camera2 Camera 2 Unknown Camera 3 MD5 Sum 391a5510264602fad51b52d747d8491 Unknown Camera 3 Sep 9 2011 13 41 15 GMT 0400 Sep 9 2011 13 41 30 GMT 0400 4MB Download Delete MD5 Sum 0536609f439662245b5acb2cb61adb57 4 Click Download a Windows Save dialog opens so that you can save an ISO file to an available file path End Procedure 26 2 Deleting NVR 4 1 ISO Files Step Action Select Video Select ISO Files Each ISO file is listed with its relevant data Click Delete the selected ISO file s are deleted kh OO N End NVR 4 1 to NVR 4 2 1 Upgrade To initialize the upgrade of the NVR the system must boot from the software disk USB 280 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Procedure 26 3 Launching the Upgrade Tool Step Action 1 Insert the NVR software CD into the CD DVD drive or insert the
194. ing the DHCP Server Settings Note When the NVR is supplied as a hardware and software bundle only LAN 1 will be enabled all other NIC s will be disabled Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Network Settings General Network Settings The General Network page provides you the option to edit the basic connection settings for the NVR network and to enable disable its NTP functionality These settings include Domain Name Domain Name Servers Default Gateway RTSP Port NTP Status and NTP Servers Figure 15 2 General Network Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Network General Live Video Cameras Domain Name Domain Name Servers Storage System Default Gateway 10 51 54 254 Network RTSP Port 554 gt General LAN Interface NTP Status Enable Disable DHCP Server NTP Servers WAN Settings Dynamic Bandwidth Advanced Hybrid A Tyco Intemational Company Domain Name and Domain Name Servers Under the General Network settings you can assign a bespoke Domain Name and create a list of DNS servers which provide name resolution services i e convert hostnames to IP addresses Procedure 15 1 Edit the Domain Name and Domain Name Servers Step Action Select Network 2 Select General The General Network settings page opens 3 To edit the Domain Name select the current value Update the Domain Name as required The field background changes to yellow indicating a cha
195. is recording to Procedure 8 8 Setting the Recording Retention Period for a Camera Step Action 1 Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Click Setup in the camera record for which you want to set the recording retention period The Function amp Streams page opens Enter the Recording Retention Period in the Days Hours and Minutes fields Click Apply End Configuring Camera Audio Settings You can configure audio settings for cameras that support audio streams If a camera supports audio streams an Enabled checkbox is available in the Audio Settings section in the Function and Stream area of the camera Advanced Edit page If audio is not supported on a camera Not Supported displays in the Audio Settings section Note Audio playback is not available via the NVR Server Web Interface The Audio Settings are used to determine how audio streams are made available to victor unified client Audio and video are derived from the camera as two separate packet streams Depending on the camera manufacturer and video audio codec combination these data streams may not be exactly in synchronization for live streaming The NVR s live streaming method is to pull video and audio from the camera and push it to the client straight away This helps achieve low video latency but sometimes at the expense of live audio video synchronization Recorded playback of the same audio and video may give better audio video synchronization results
196. itrate Cap dropdowns display The Transcode Limit Dropdown displays 4 To edit the Client and Stream fields select the current values Update the Client and Stream values as required The field backgrounds change to yellow indicating a change has been made 5 The WAN and LAN Bitrate Caps can be set to either a predefined value from the dropdown menus or alternatively a custom value can be entered in the field To use a predefined value open the dropdown select the desired predefined value from the list Or a To use a custom value select Custom from the dropdown The custom entry field displays b To edit the bitrate cap value select the current values Update the bitrate cap value as required 5 American Dynamics 167 Network Settings The field backgrounds change to yellow indicating a change has been made Note The custom value must be entered in kbps For example to enter a value of 5 5Mbps you would type a value of 5500 From the Transcode Limit dropdown select the number of streams desired Click Save Confirmation messages display End 168 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual System Shutdown and Reset Factory Defaults Overview This chapter describes how to use the system shutdown functions of the NVR and how to reset the NVR to factory default settings The Shutdown page allows you to Restart the NVR Services Stop NVR Services Reboot the NVR and Shutdown the NVR Figure 16 1 Shutd
197. lar storage set A American Dynamics 59 Configuring Storage Verifying Storage Devices The Virtual Disks aka LUNs or Volumes may have all been detected by the NVR but not necessarily configured for usage by the NVR Ensure that your devices are listed in the Devices list on the Basic Storage Configuration page before moving on to the next section If any expected storage is missing from the Basic Storage Configuration page then it is either physically disconnected the storage device is not recognized due to improper configuration or lack of device driver support and or experiencing a storage hardware problem This may also occur if the filesystem is not mounted caution If you are using RAID storage systems you must create disk groups and virtual disks on your RAID hardware before setting up storage on the NVR If you are not familiar with RAID configuration refer to your storage system s user manual for more information Basic Storage Configuration 60 Basic storage configuration is the default storage configuration type Basic storage configuration is the configuration of media folders to be used for recording All storage devices discovered by the NVR are listed in the default storage set All cameras added to the NVR are also automatically assigned to the default storage set You can select which media folders you want to use for media storage and set the amount of space available to store media Table 5 1 below describes
198. le maximizing the virtual disk size The R710 bundled server storage set performance supports a maximum of 32 cameras or 100Mbps on each storage set whichever is reached first Total input to server is 400Mbps The R720 bundled server storage set performance supports a maximum of 64 cameras or 200Mbps on each storage set whichever is reached first Total input to server is 400Mbps The Software Only option installed on hardware that meets the minimum requirements supports a maximum of 32 cameras or 100Mbps on each storage set whichever is reached first Total input to server is 400Mbps Procedure 5 5 Creating a Storage Set Step Action 1 Select the Storage menu 2 Select Advanced The Advanced Storage Configuration page opens Figure 5 2 3 Click Add Storage Set A new storage set is created End 5 American Dynamics 67 Configuring Storage Media Folder Assignment for Storage Sets When you create a new storage set you need to assign media folders and cameras to it To assign media folders to a new storage set you need to reassign media folders from the default storage set or an existing storage set There is no limit to the number of media folders you can assign to a storage set There are however some restrictions You are able to add a system disk to a storage set by specifying a particular folder on the system disk It is recommended that the folder you specify exists on a separate partition on the system disk
199. lect Analytics Off Motion Detection or Video Intelligence Stream 1 Stream 2 settings If a second stream is available on the camera use these settings to select which stream is to be used for a Live video b Alarms and c Recording You can assign each of these to either Stream 1 or Stream 2 as required You can also adjust the Codec FPS and stream Resolution settings for each stream 5 Click Save End Batch Camera Configuration Some camera settings can be edited in batch The Batch Edit page Figure 8 2 lists the cameras currently being edited in the left pane and the setting adjustments are made in the pane on the right When a change is made to a setting the checkbox next to the setting is checked When you deselect the checkbox the new setting adjustment will not be applied to the cameras Before you apply the setting adjustments to all cameras the changes that will be made to the settings are previewed with the new settings highlighted in yellow 86 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Cameras currently being edited Indicates which settings will be updated Camera Configuration Figure 8 2 Batch Edit Page Batch Edit Changes made will be applied to the Name Setti ngs that following camera s i can be edited iD CAMERA DETAILS Maxi Storage Per Camera 1 Axi i 30 Days 9 Y Hours O Y Minutes F 4 Dome RESOLUTION CAE Procedure 8 2 Bat
200. lect the Connection tab The Connection page opens End Camera Logs The Camera Log page provides information on camera reboots changes to camera recording status and the use of the Pan Tilt Zoom PTZ and other controls 204 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Figure 19 6 Camera Logs Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Live Video Cameras Storage System Network Advanced Failover Storage Statistics gt Logs Dark Image Detection Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Monitor Output Tours Monitor Output Presets Hybrid Camera Logs Date Time Category Camera ABOUT Details Logs Jul 30 2012 14 39 53 Start Continuous Recording M D request Name P 10 Start Continuous M D Recordin IP 2 192 168 201 44 Aug 01 2012 13 52 06 Start MD request Name IP 5 Camera 5 127 0 0 1 Start M D Based Recording Aug 01 2012 13 52 11 Start Continuous Recording M D request Name IP 5 Start Continuous M D Recording Camera 5 127 0 0 1 k Aug 01 2012 14 37 19 Aug 01 2012 15 53 04 Start continuous recording request Start Continuous Recording M D request Name IP Name IP 5 Camera 5 127 0 0 1 4 Start Continuous M D Recording Camera 4 127 0 0 1 Start continuous recording Date Time Category
201. led checkbox 6 Click Apply The NVR is added to the server monitoring list 7 Optional Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to add another NVR to monitor Select the Advanced tab Edit the required Failover parameters a Polling Interval Click Edit enter the interval time in seconds and click Save This is how often the failover server checks the live server b Config Update Interval Click Edit enter the interval time in seconds and click Save This is the interval when the failover server checks the live server s configuration and takes a copy of it when it changes c Heartbeat Timeout Click Edit enter the timeout in seconds and click Save This is the timeout of the polling interval d Retry Count Click Edit enter the retry count and click Save This is the number of polling failures until the live server is considered to be inoperable and Failover should begin End Disable Failover Mode After you have recovered the failed NVR it will remain in an idle state until the Failover NVR is disabled 5 American Dynamics 179 NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates When you disable the Failover NVR the Failover NVR returns to monitoring the server list caution To disable failover mode for an NVR you must disable it from the failover NVR s configuration interface and not from the interface of any of the monitored NVRs Procedure 17 2 Disabling Failover Mode Step Action Select Advanced from the
202. les config at usr sbin isax line Installation complete Performing post installation upgrade tasks Installation complete Reboot now Y n J 3 Enter Y followed by the Return key The NVR reboots 4 When the NVR has restarted and the BIOS prompt displays you should remove the software CD USB drive Note If you accidently reboot the NVR and do not remove the software CD USB you should reboot again and remove the CD USB when the BIOS prompt displays A American Dynamics 289 Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 290 10 The NVR will load to the License agreement and user accounts page For further information refer to Procedure 3 10 Rebooting the NVR After Basic Installation on page 21 Log in to the Linux OS of the NVR using the root user account Select the VideoEdge Administrator icon Figure 26 15 VideoEdge Administrator Icon RE Vidaga Adrninistricor You will be prompted to enter a Username and Password Enter the following credentials Username admin Password VIDEO edge23 Click OK The Setup Wizard s Welcome page opens Complete the Setup Wizard For further information refer to VideoEdge Setup Wizard on page 25 NVR 4 1 settings will already be implemented as you progress through the Setup Wizard Verify these previous NVR settings and configure any new settings which are available on the NVR 4 2 1 software that the wizard may prompt for The storage partitions from your 4 1 NVR are
203. lick Add Storage Set to create a new storage set Use the checkboxes to select media folders Use the Move to Storage Set dropdown to select the storage set you wish to move the media folders to 4 Click Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 28 Assign Cameras Settings Note For further information on assigning cameras to storage sets refer to Media Folder Assignment for Storage Sets on page 68 End Assign Cameras Page The Assign Cameras page allows you to assign cameras to different storage sets to best suit your storage specifications You can also calibrate each camera to calculate its data transfer rate which you can use to determine the best storage set to assign it to 46 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR Figure 3 25 Assign Cameras Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Assign Cameras Preparation nea v Setup Please Note Calibrating the cameras will allow recording to continue for 2 minutes and then calculate the data transfer rate in kilobits per second for each camera over these last two v Failover Sonam System Denotes Kbps for last 2 minutes of recorded media v General v Roles Default Storage Set 1 Total Mbps 0 00 Network RETENTION WATED Kbps sa W D NAME MODEL PERIOD Last 24 Hrs Max Retention 1 axis 00408c7f4ce7 v WAN v Bandwidth Throtting Storage Set 2 Total Mbps 0 00 D
204. list m Click Next The value in the Connected field has been updated to True This means the storage device is connected to the NVR n To confirm the storage session is connected log into the storage web interface see Steps 3 to 6 select the iSCSI configuration in the menu select Session and ensure the session is connected with the correct initiator name Mount the storage drive on the NVR a Select Partitioner from the System section in the Control Center A warning message opens b Click Yes The Expert Partitioner window opens c Expand the Hard Disks menu d Select the new storage device from the list of hard disks Information about the storage partitions on the disk is displayed in the Partitions tab e Click the Expert dropdown list f Select Create New Partition Table from the dropdown A message box opens g Select the GPT partition type h Click OK A message box opens to confirm that you are sure you want to create a new partition 5 American Dynamics 233 Appendix A Storage 234 14 i Click Yes j Click Add The Add Partition window opens k Set the new partition size You can select Maximum Size Custom Size and enter a value or select Custom Region where you can choose the disk cylinders for the partition Note In order to use a disk partition for storage it must meet the minimum storage capacity requirements 10GB Click Next m Ensure the Format partition option button is selected Select XFS f
205. ll result in automatic termination of this EULA 5 U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Software is Commercial Computer Software provided with restricted rights under Federal Acquisition Regulations and agency supplements to them Any use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFAR 255 227 7013 et seq or 252 211 7015 or subparagraphs a through d of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable or similar clauses in the NASA FAR Supplement Contractor manufacturer is Sensormatic Electronics LLC 6 Technology Park Drive Westford MA 01886 6 LIMITED WARRANTY a Warranty Tyco warrants that the recording medium on which the Software is recorded hardware key and the documentation provided with it will be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of delivery to the first user Tyco further warrants that for the same period the Software provided on the recording medium under this license will substantially perform as described in the user documentation Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual End User License Agreement EULA provided with the product when used with specified hardware THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WARRANTY REPLACES AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS WH
206. llocation LAN IP Address Subnet Mask and IP Broadcast Address The page will also display the MAC address for each NIC on the NVR 152 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Figure 15 3 LAN Interface Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Live Video Cameras Storage System Network General gt LAN Interface DHCP Server WAN Settings Dynamic Bandwidth Advanced Hybrid LAN Interface Network Settings LAN Interface ethO IP Address Allocation LAN IP Address Subnet Mask IP Broadcast MAC Address LAN Interface eth1 IP Address Allocation LAN IP Address Subnet Mask IP Broadcast MAC Address DHCP 10 51 54 108 255 255 255 0 10 51 54 255 00 0A CD 1C 5C 98 STATIC 192 168 200 167 255 255 0 0 192 168 200 255 E0 69 95 0D 76 97 A Tyco Intemational Company Procedure 15 6 Enabling NIC s Step Action 1 Select Network 2 Select LAN Interface The LAN Interface page opens 3 Select the dropdown arrow next to the LAN Interface you wish to edit 4 Select Edit 5 Select the IP Address Allocation dropdown 6 Select DHCP this will allow a DHCP Server on the LAN to assign an IP address for that NIC of the NVR Note The use of DHCP for all of the NVR s NICs is not recommended To open the NVR Web Interface the IP address of one of the NICs must be known if all the IP addresses are dynamic they will vary in value It is recommended that
207. ls Procedure 23 4 Configure Settings for QuickTime Use on Windows 7 Step Action 1 Navigate to Start gt Control Panel gt System and Security gt Windows Firewall 2 Verify that Windows Firewall is Off turn it off if it is set to On Figure 23 4 Windows Firewall Settings gO gt Control Panel System and Security Windows Firewall File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Hi iiai i aim a P Help protect your computer with Windows Firewall Allow a program or feature Windows Firewall can help prevent hackers or malicious software from gaining access to your computer through Windows Firewall through the Internet or a network Change notification settings How does a firewall help protect my computer Turn Windows Firewall on or What are network locations off Restore defaults For your security some settings are managed by your system administrator Advanced settings Update your Firewall settings Windows Firewall is not using the recommended settings to protect your computer Troubleshoot my network F Use recommended settings What are the recommended settings m x Domain networks Connected Networks at a workplace that are attached to a domain Windows Firewall state Incoming connections Block all connections to programs that are not on the list of allowed programs Active domain networks Be compdomain net Notification state Notify me when Windows Firewall blocks a new program F
208. ly granted under this EULA are reserved by Tyco and its suppliers 2 GRANT OF LICENSE This EULA grants you the following rights on a non exclusive basis a General This EULA permits you to use the Software for which you have purchased this EULA Once you have purchased licenses for the number of copies of the Software that you require you may use the Software and accompanying material provided that you install and use no more than the licensed number of copies at one time The Software is only licensed for use with specified Licensor supplied Systems If the Software is protected by a software or hardware key or other device the Software may be used on any computer on which the key is installed If the key locks the Software to a particular System the Software may only be used on that System b Locally Stored Components The Software may include a software code component that may be stored and operated locally on one or more devices Once you have paid the required license fees for these devices as determined by Tyco in its sole discretion you may install and or use one copy of such component of the Software on each of the devices as licensed by Tyco You may then use access display run or otherwise interact with use such component of the Software in connection with operating the device on which it is installed solely in the manner set Ay American Dynamics 295 End User License Agreement EULA 296 forth in any accompanyin
209. m32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 76611 Copyright lt c gt 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved iC gt ping wwuw example com Pinging www example 192 8 43 1A1 with 32 hutes of data bytes 32 time 91ims TTL 242 time 95ms TTL 242 43 10 2 time 91ms TTL 242 Reply from 192 00 43 10 bytes 32 time 9ims TTL 242 Ping statistics for 192 00 43 10 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0z loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum fims Maximum 95ms Average 92ms gt End Troubleshooting with the Tracert Command Another tool that can be used is the Tracert command This command will display other network devices that are along the path from which the packet took to reach its destination This tool is best for locating a single point of failure on a network 258 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Procedure 24 7 Use of the Tracert Command Step Action 1 Open a Windows Command Prompt Refer to Procedure 24 3 Launch Windows Command Prompt Windows XP Or Procedure 24 4 Launch the Windows Command Prompt Windows 7 2 To use tracert to trace the connection between your Client PC and the NVR type tracert lt IP address of the NVR gt The tracert function will displays in the command prompt window A typical tracert output is shown in Figure 24 17 in this case an example of a tracert to www example com Y
210. main menu 2 To view storage set statistics select Storage Sets page Or To view device statistics select Device page Or To view camera statistics select Cameras page 5 American Dynamics 197 Operational Statistics The required statistics are displayed For further information refer to Table 18 3 Table 18 4 or Table 18 5 End 198 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Logs Overview This chapter describes the features of the Logs submenu and the Connected Clients sub menu The NVR tracks important types of system events You can view logs of the following e Administrative changes e Camera alerts e Changes to cameras e System events used by American Dynamics technical support The Logs page provides access to the NVRs log settings this allows you to retrieve logs edit the FTP Log Management settings filter searches for Events Logs view Camera Connection Errors Camera Logs and an Audit Trail Using the Connected Clients page you can view a summary of the victor clients which are currently streaming video from the NVR Retrieving Logs The Retrieve Logs page provides you the ability to customise the search criteria for retrieving log files The editable criteria includes a date and time range selection options for retrieving camera logs recording pipeline descriptions camera firmware details and core files A dropdown also provides selectable maximum camera log sizes of 1Mb 5Mb 1
211. main menu 2 Select Failover The Failover page opens Select the Disable tab Click Disable this NVR as a Failover Server The Failover server returns to monitoring the server list End Configuration Backup and Restore With the NVR you can recover a server s configuration data in the event of a system failure A system backup file can be stored to a USB or local disk The backup files can then be imported to the NVR where the saved configuration can be restored 180 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates Figure 17 2 Backup Window American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Backup Live Video System Backup Cameras Select the settings to save then click Backup to save a file that represents a backup of your VideoEdge NVR Storage NOTE A backup configuration file can be used for system recovery Create a backup configuration file whenever any change is made to your System system General Man Roles F Camera Settings Licensing 7 System Settings V User Information V DHCP Settings P NTP Settings Templates gt Backup Restore Update Software PTZ Serial Protocols Network Advanced Hybrid A Tyco Intemational Company Create a Configuration Backup File You can create a backup file using the Backup Restore functionality in the NVR interface You can choose the type of configuration settings to be s
212. mera Network with Ethernet Switch T ba v T iSCSI RAID Rack Mount Remote victor Clients via Internet victor Site Local Web Clients Manager Local Area Network Backbone LAN 1 Connects the NVR to the network with client PCs Client PCs typically access the NVR through this port Note LAN 1 s default IP Address for an NVR supplied as a hardware and software bundle is 10 10 10 10 LAN 2 Connects the camera network to the NVR With this architecture the NVR acts as a firewall between users and the cameras The users do not have direct access to the cameras on LAN 2 and must access the NVR in order to view and configure the cameras As the LAN 2 cameras are not on the main network they use less network bandwidth from the main network In this example DHCP is enabled on LAN 2 so that the NVR can automatically assign IP addresses to cameras that are added to LAN 2 The NVR can have DHCP enabled for each of its NIC s LAN 3 Connects network storage devices to the NVR caution Connecting an NVR running a DHCP server to a network that already has a DHCP server can disrupt network service on that network 148 If you have more than one NVR on LAN 2 you will need to disable DHCP on all but one of the LAN 2 NVRs so that cameras are receiving IP Addresses from only one DHCP server To disable the DHCP on LAN 2 you will need to log into the NVR refer to Procedure 15 9 Editing the DHCP Server Settings on page 156Edit
213. mera from the NVR you will no longer be able to view live video record media or access the camera via victor unified client Procedure 7 6 Removing a Camera Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List The Camera List opens Figure 7 1 Select the checkbox in the camera record s of the camera s you want to remove 4 Click Remove Camera s A message box opens for confirmation that you want to remove the camera s Message from webpage Are you sure you want to remove the selected cameras Gree Click OK The camera s are removed from the NVR End 84 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Configuration Overview This chapter describes how to configure cameras that have been added to the NVR You can configure one camera on its own or if required you can configure multiple cameras together with the same settings using batch camera configuration To configure camera settings use the Camera List page If you use the Camera List summary table you can edit basic camera settings however if you click the Setup icon for a particular camera additional tabs open From these tabs you can configure all the supported settings for a selected camera Basic Camera Configuration The settings displayed for each camera in the Camera List are a summary of the current camera configuration settings All camera settings can be updated using advanced camera configuration refer to
214. meters and delete the old alarm 6 Select Save End Disabling Video Intelligence Camera Alarm When a Video Intelligence camera alarm is not needed at present but will be needed in the future the alarm can be disabled The alarm configuration remains the same for when it is enabled again You can also edit the alarm configuration parameters while the alarm is disabled once enabled the changes will take effect Procedure 10 5 Disabling a Camera Alarm Step Action 1 Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Alarms The Camera Alarm Configuration page opens Figure 10 2 5 American Dynamics 121 Video Intelligence 122 Select the alarm record you want to disable Click Edit Select the No option button in the Enabled field Click Save ao a Fk Ww End Deleting a Video Intelligence Camera Alarm When a camera alarm is no longer required it can be deleted Procedure 10 6 Deleting a Video Intelligence Camera Alarm Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select Alarms The Camera Alarm Configuration page opens Figure 10 2 Select the alarm record you want to delete 4 Click Delete The alarm record is removed from the alarm table End Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Scheduler Overview This chapter describes how to set up and enable the camera scheduler By using a camera schedule you can set the NVR to automatically change recording modes hourl
215. mple use it to detect when a stationary object was placed moved or removed The Video Intelligence settings allow you to define the parameters which will initiate an alarm an alarm rule This will reduce the number of unwanted alarm events The parameters available are dependent on the type of Video Intelligence rules which are defined Video Intelligence provides useful information only if recording is enabled on the camera Your camera should be configured with Recording Normal Off Alarm On or Recording Always with Alarm On recording modes For further information on camera recording modes refer to Table 7 1 Camera List Summary on page 77 A American Dynamics 113 Video Intelligence Video Intelligence events will create entries in the victor site manager database If required you can use the Reports feature in victor unified client to retrieve event information To carry out Video Intelligence based activities you need to enable Video Intelligence on the NVR Video Intelligence Best Practices 114 To ensure you get the highest quality results when using Video Intelligence on the NVR it is recommended that you adhere to the following An object exhibiting movement or a change in the scene background must be large enough to be detected i e it must be around 1 25 of the image size The color of the object in grayscale should be approximately 10 15 different than the background The frame rate of the video should be high eno
216. ms will not be generated Supported modes are Recording Normal Off Alarm On or Recording Always with Alarm On e Green Alarm is enabled and a supported recording mode is selected Alarms will be generated Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Motion Detection Figure 9 2 Camera Alarm Configuration American Dynamics A Tyco In Live Video Cameras List Alarms Scheduler Passwords Discovery Storage System Network Advanced Hybrid te Company Alarms enabled Draw Style Free Draw Polygon Rectangle 1 WARNING For Motion Meta Data and or Video Intelligence alarms to be enabled the camera must be in one of the alarm recording modes with at least ONE alarm Current Record Status MO GS ADD Video Intelligence and or Motion Meta Data is not enabled Click HERE to edit camera settings Table 9 2 Drawing Tools Tool Type Options Description Draw Style Free Draw Draw using free draw by clicking on the window and dragging to draw the shape The detection area is highlighted in yellow Polygon Draw a polygon by clicking once in the window and use the lines to form the region of interest Click again to confirm the line Double click when the shape is complete to finalise the detection area The detection area is highlighted in yellow Rectangle Draw a rectangle by clicking once in the window and drag
217. n Installing the VideoEdge NVR In order to provide reliable playback both the NVR and victor client must be NTP clients of the same NTP server 5 American Dynamics 33 Installing the VideoEdge NVR 4 To edit the NTP Status click either the Enable or Disable option button Click Save Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 19 LAN Interface Settings Note For further information on general network settings refer to General Network Settings on page 149 End LAN Interface Page The LAN page is used to edit the LAN interface settings for each NIC including IP address allocation LAN IP address subnet mask and IP broadcast The NVR can have multiple active NICs This allows the use of dedicated camera networks Figure 3 15 LAN Interface Page American Dynamics LAN Interface Preparation cai LAN interface etho P Address Allocation STATIC LAN P Address 10 10 10 10 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 P Broadcast 192 168 188 255 MAC Address 00 19 B9 F7 D4 4E LAN Interface eth1 IP Address Allocation ameras Procedure 3 19 LAN Interface Settings Step Action 1 To edit the LAN Interface settings select Edit next to the NIC you want to modify You can edit the following fields 34 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR e IP Address Allocation Note To open the NVR Web Interface the IP address of one of the NICs must be k
218. n Select Network 2 Select General The General Network settings page opens 3 To edit the NTP Status click either the Enable or Disable option buttons The area behind the option buttons changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 Click Save A confirmation message displays End 5 American Dynamics 151 Network Settings Procedure 15 5 Editing the NTP Status and NTP Servers to Synchronize Date and Time from the Internet Step Action Select Network 2 Select General The General Network settings page opens 3 To edit the NTP Status click either the Enable or Disable option buttons The area behind the option buttons changes to yellow indicating a change has been made To edit the NTP Servers click the icon Enter the NTP Server IP Address in the field The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 6 To enter several NTP Server IP Addresses click the gt icon to add an additional IP Address Enter the IP Address in the field 7 Click Save A confirmation message displays End LAN Interface Settings The LAN Interface page allows you to enable and disable the NICs of the NVR Each NIC provides a LAN interface for the NVR The LAN Interface page also allows you to edit the available LAN Interfaces In the LAN Interface page the NIC s associated with the NVR will be displayed and available for editing The LAN Interface page allows you to edit the IP Address A
219. n To access recorded media from your NVR 4 1 you must import the partition setup Failure to do so will result in the loss of previously recorded media 286 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Figure 26 10 Suggested Partitioning Page Suggested Partitioning YaST Suggested Partitioning Your hard disks have been checked more Installation Delete partition dev sdq1 43 39 GB Delete partition dev sdq2 43 39 GB e Delete partition dev sdq3 43 39 GB v Welcome Y Time Zone gt Disk Installation Settings Import Mount Points from existing System Perform installation Jetc fstab found on dev sdb1 contains Configuration Device Size Type FS Type Label Mount Point Automatic Configuration dev sdb1 980 50 MB gy Linux native Ext3 boot License Agreement Jdev sdb2 914 77 GB gy Linux native XFS Administrative Password dev sdb3 15 27 GB Linux swap Swap Optional User a B Help cancel Create Partition Setup Import Partition Setup Edit Partition Setup Abort Back E Next x 12 Click Next The Live Installation Settings page displays This provides a summary of the 4 2 1 installation Note For NVR systems with a large number of external disks you may see the following error Configure a valid boot loader location before continuing The device map includes more than 8 devices and the b
220. n Email Alerts Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults and Shutdown e Failover Use to configure the NVR to take over the camera and system settings of another NVR on the network should it fail Storage Statistics Use the Rec Performance page to view a graph plotting the recording performance of each storage set Use the Rec Statistics page to view a table of information relating to the recording process of each camera added to the NVR Use the Disk Activity page to view a graph plotting the disk activity for a specific media folder over a specific time period Use the Storage Statistics page to view storage statistics for each Storage Set Device and Camera Logs Use the Retrieve Logs page to customise the search criteria for retrieving log files the criteria includes date and time range searches options to retrieve camera logs recording pipeline descriptions camera firmware details and core files The maximum size of the camera log file can be selected from a predefined dropdown list The FTP Log Management page provides the option to upload log files to an FTP server The Event Logs page is used primarily by American Dynamics technical support for troubleshooting It displays informational and error related events that have occurred on the NVR system The Connection page displays the Camera Connection Errors that have occurred The Camera Logs page provides information on camera reboots changed to camera recording status and the u
221. n 179 disabling 179 Filtering camera list 79 301 Index FRS FES connecting to NVR 228 G Groups camera password 91 131 deleting camera password 133 Installation VideoEdgeNVR 4 2 7 iSCSI connecting to NVR 230 L Licensing 281 Listing NVR cameras 79 Live Video QuickTime viewer 75 viewing 74 Login NVR configuration interface via victor 52 NVR webserver interface 51 Logs 199 alert 215 camera 204 camera connection errors 203 event 202 FTP log management 201 retrieving 199 Motion Detection alarms 106 best practices 103 disabling 106 enabling 104 302 N Navigation main menu 57 tabs 57 Network configuration 147 DHCP settings 155 WAN settings 157 NVR Services restart 169 stop 170 O Operational Statistics 189 P Paging File Configuration 237 Password changing admin password 31 deleting groups 133 password groups 91 131 Prerequisite Software 237 R Rebooting 171 Recording modes 95 schedule 123 Remote desktop 264 RDP 264 VNC 267 Requirements prerequisite software 237 system 6 Restart NVR Services 169 Restore configuration 182 factory default settings 172 VideoEdge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual S Set Up email alerts 210 Statistics disk activity 193 recording 190 recording performance 189 storage 194 storage device 195 storage per camera 195 196 storage set 194 Stop NVR Services 170 Storage calculating requirements 226 concepts 221 con
222. n and warranty of those portions of the Software including what is commonly known as open source software A copy of each applicable third party license can be found in the file README TXT or other documentation accompanying the Software By using the Software you are also agreeing to be bound to the terms of such third party licenses If provided for in the applicable third party license you have a right to receive source code for such software for use and distribution in any program that you create so long as you in turn agree to be bound to the terms of the applicable third party license and your programs are distributed under the terms of that license A copy of such source code may be obtained free of charge by contacting your Tyco representative g Trademarks This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of Tyco its affiliates or its suppliers h Rental You may not sublicense rent lease or lend the Software You may not make it available to others or post it on a server or web site or otherwise distribute it i Software Keys The hardware software key where applicable is your proof of license to exercise the rights granted herein and must be retained by you Lost or stolen keys will not be replaced j Demonstration and Evaluation Copies A demonstration or evaluation copy of the Software is covered by this EULA provided that the licenses contained herein shall expire at the end of t
223. n the folder is not removed by default You are given the option to retain or remove the recorded media Information in the media database is however removed When you remove a media folder if the NVR is actively recording to that folder it will automatically transition recording to another media folder in the same storage set Once a media folder is removed from storage the NVR will no longer record to that folder Procedure 5 2 Disabling a Storage Media Folder Step Action 1 Select the Storage menu 2 Select Basic The Basic Storage Configuration page opens Figure 5 1 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Configuring Storage 3 Select the checkbox for the media folder you want to use for storage and click Remove From Storage Or Select EDIT in the media folder record you want to use for storage in the Use For Storage field select the dropdown arrow click the Disable indicator then select Save 4 Click OK to delete any previously recorded media The Use For Storage indicator turns gray indicating that the media folder is not being used for storage End Allocating Storage Space for Media When a media folder has been enabled for storage by default all of the media folder will be used for storage You can set the amount of space to be used for storage as required Procedure 5 3 Allocating Storage Space for Media Step Action Select the Storage menu 2 Select Basic The Basic Storage Configur
224. nable automatic camera focus Lens Iris Select the iris value for the camera from the dropdown list Lens Auto Iris Select the checkbox to enable automatic iris control Lens Day Night Mode Select the required mode from the dropdown list Lens WDR Wide Dynamic Range Select the checkbox to enable WDR 7 Click Apply The viewer window updates to reflect the changes made to the image settings End Configure Camera Function and Stream Settings The Function and Stream camera settings section is where you configure 5 American Dynamics 93 Camera Configuration e Camera Recording Status e Motion Detection e Motion Sensitivity Motion Detection only e Video Intelligence e Recording Retention period e Audio e Stream Settings Record Status Generate Meta Data Motion Sensitivity Recording Retention Period 0 Audio Settings Stream Configuration I Stream 1 Live x 25 VBR 4000 BIT RATE CONTROL Cancel 94 Figure 8 8 Function and Stream Settings Stream 2 Live Record Analytics Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Configuration Set the Camera Recording Status The recording status setting on the camera determines when the camera records There are 4 recording modes available described in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Recording Statuses Mode Icon Description Recording Off Camera is not recording Live video can still be viewed
225. nal File Edit View Terminal Help NVR 4 1 to 4 2 Upgrade Precheck Storage Settings 2 Once complete a Backup Complete message will display Press the Return key to initiate the second stage of the upgrade process Installation of NVR 4 2 1 Software Figure 26 5 Backup Complete Terminal File Edit View Terminal Help NVR 4 1 to 4 2 Upgrade Backup complete See backupLog txt for details Status Success 4 1 configuration data copied to mnt mediadb backup_files 3 A warning message displays before launching the second stage To continue enter Y followed by the Return key If you abort the upgrade at this point you can remove the software CD USB drive and reboot the NVR Your 4 1 software will open as before If you continue to progress with the upgrade you will be unable to roll back the software to 4 1 without encountering issues A American Dynamics 283 Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Figure 26 6 Proceed with Install Terminal File Edit View Terminal Help NVR Upgrade Installation Phase The backup of NVR Release 4 1 configuration files and databases is complete The next phase will require installation of NVR Release 4 2 Installing NVR Release 4 2 will require a reformat of the exi ting NVR system disk dev sdb Continuing with the installation at this point will delete NVR Release 4 1 from your system disk Do you wish to proceed with the installation y N J
226. nctionality 0 0 0 e eee eae 100 Return to Home cs saa a a opaa a a a a a eee eee 101 Motion Detection OVEIMIOW sian ita ora de een alae dia wee Vou A te yea EASE A AA 103 Motion Detection Best Practices 0 0 0 103 Enabling Motion Detection 0 00 0 eae 104 Disabling Motion Detection 0 0 0 c cee eae 106 Motion Detection Alarms 000 eee eae 106 Creating a Motion Detection Camera Alarm 00000 0c eeeees 108 Editing a Motion Detection Camera Alarm 1 2 0 2 000 ee 110 Disabling a Motion Detection Camera Alarm 1 00 ee 110 Deleting a Motion Detection Camera Alarm 0 0000 eee eee 111 Video Intelligence OVEIVIOW sac a Sa Pea ee Re ea A de de Soa Cae a wea ee Bele Jay 113 Video Intelligence Best Practices 2 2 eee 114 Enable Video Intelligence fora Camera n u anaana aaaea 115 Disable Video Intelligence fora Camera 0 cae 116 Video Intelligence Camera Alarms 6 0 0 0 0 ccc eee 117 Creating a Video Intelligence Camera Alarm 00000000 eee eeeaes 118 Editing a Video Intelligence Camera Alarm onanan auaa aaaea 120 Disabling Video Intelligence Camera Alarm 2 0 000 ee 121 Deleting a Video Intelligence Camera Alarm 1 2 ce 122 viii VideoEdge NVR 4 2 1 Installtion and User Manual Table of Contents Camera Scheduler OVERVIEW a ais sew ata he hata gee i eae et BM a Oe aetna gla eG ees me 2 emer a 123 Create a R
227. ne boots up e Use the following IP address Select this option if you want to manually configure the TCP IP settings This option is strongly recommended because 248 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting you can specify the IP address which makes it easier to do network troubleshooting should the need arise 10 This dialog box also provides two options for assigning a DNS address You may or may not need a DNS address depending on the network Consult your network administrator for more information e Obtain DNS server address automatically Receives the DNS server address from a DHCP server Use the following DNS server addresses Allows you to add the DNS server s IP address es by hand Figure 24 5 IP Addressing Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following iP address IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server 11 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties pop up Click OK again to close the Local Area Connection Properties pop up 12 Attempt again to communicate to the network fr
228. necting devices 228 230 data culling 63 device configuration advanced 65 device configuration basic 60 monitoring 67 sets 59 225 types 222 vaulted media 64 Storage Sets camera assignment 68 creating 67 deleting 70 media folder assignment 68 statistics 194 System requirements 6 shutdown 171 System ID changing 136 T Template importing 186 saving 185 V Video Intelligence AS American Dynamics Index alarms 117 best practices 114 disabling 116 enabling 115 VideoEdge NVR login victor 52 login web GUI 51 reboot 171 shutdown 169 171 Viewing live video 74 303 Index 304 VideoEdge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual
229. nfiguration process for an NVR software only package Before installation you must ensure that the system drive is connected to the SATA 0 location on the motherboard The installation and configuration process consists of 1 Optional Verifying the BIOS Configuration 2 Booting the system using the NVR software disk 3 Using the NVR Wizard to a Configure system information settings b Configure disk partitions Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual N oO oO f Installing the VideoEdge NVR c Verify the boot loader location d Complete basic installation A system reboot after basic installation Setting up NVR OS user accounts Logging into the NVR desktop Configuring the NVR using the Setup Wizard Verify the BIOS Configuration If required you may need to verify the system BIOS settings before installing the NVR software Procedure 3 4 Verify BIOS Configuration Step Action 1 Power on the system 2 While the system is booting up enter the BIOS menu by pressing the appropriate key Usually the system will inform you of the appropriate key during bootup but refer to your user manual if necessary 3 Confirm that all of the installed devices e g hard drives and CD DVD drives are recognized 4 Do not adjust the time or date in BIOS You will set the date and time on the Server s web based interface Confirm that the hyper threading is enabled if it is available Confirm that the 1st Boot Device is CD DVD or Al
230. ng modes for different days and times repeat steps 5 to 8 until the Schedule Times chart is set as required for the recording schedule group Select the Group Editor tab Select the cameras you want to be in this schedule group by selecting the checkbox es for the cameras from the All other cameras list and use the gt gt arrow to move them to the This group list Note Each camera can only be assigned to one schedule Click Save Repeat steps 3 to 12 to configure additional schedule groups for the camera schedule End Enabling Disabling the Recording Schedule Procedure 11 2 Enabling Disabling a Camera Schedule Step Action 126 Select Cameras from the main menu Select Scheduler The Schedules page opens To enable the camera schedule select the Scheduling Status Enabled option button Or To disable the camera schedule select the Scheduling Status Disabled option button End Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Camera Scheduler Editing the Recording Schedule If changes need to be made to the recording schedule that has been set up you can edit all aspects of the recording schedule as required The following sections describe how to make changes to the recording schedule Edit the Group Name You may want to update the schedule group name to reflect changes made within the schedule group Procedure 11 3 Editing the Schedule Group Name Step Action 1 Select Cam
231. nge has been made 4 To add a Domain Name Server to the Domain Name Servers select the gt icon A text box displays 5 Enter the IP Address in the field The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 6 To enter several Domain Server IP Addresses select the gt icon to add an additional IP Address field and enter the IP Address 5 American Dynamics 149 Network Settings 150 7 Click Save Confirmation messages display End Default Gateway In the General Network settings you can edit the IP Address of the Default Gateway The default gateway must be set manually if the NVR is not using a DHCP server The default gateway allows the NVR to have connectivity with IP addresses beyond the directly connected subnets of its own NICs Procedure 15 2 Editing the Default Gateway Step Action Select Network 2 Select General The General Network settings page opens 3 To edit the Default Gateway select the current value Update the Default Gateway as required The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 Click Save A warning dialog will display stating Changing the default gateway may result in your NVR becoming inaccessible If this happens you will need to physically connect to the NVR to re enable network access Are you sure you want to proceed 5 Click OK A confirmation message displays End RTSP Port If you need to modify the defaul
232. nown if all the IP addresses are dynamic they will vary in value It is recommended that a NIC is configured with a static IP address and subnet mask for this reason e LAN IP address e Subnet Mask Note The Subnet Mask is defined by three classes of IP Address A B and C which will determine its value They are as follows e Class A First Octet Decimal Range 1 126 Subnet Mask Value 255 0 0 0 e Class B First Octet Decimal Range 128 191 Subnet Mask Value 255 255 0 0 e Class C First Octet Decimal Range 192 223 Subnet Mask Value 255 255 255 0 Class A addresses 127 0 0 0 to 127 255 255 255 cannot be used and are reserved for loopback and diagnostic functions e IP broadcast 2 Edit the setting as required and click Save 3 Click Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 20 WAN Settings Note For further information on LAN interface settings refer to Procedure 15 8 Editing the LAN Interface Values on page 154 End 5 American Dynamics 35 Installing the VideoEdge NVR WAN Settings Page The WAN Settings page is used to edit the WAN settings including the WAN IP address HTTP port secure HTTP port and streaming configured port Figure 3 16 WAN Settings Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company WAN IP Address Preparation Welcome HTTP Port Streaming Configured Port 554 Cancel LAN WAN Bandwidth Throttling Procedure 3 20 WAN Settings
233. ns 000 cee ee E 228 Connecting Additional Storage Devices 0 cc ee 228 Connecting NVR to FRS FES Using Fibre 00 000 228 Connecting NVR to FRS FES Using iSCSI aaua auaa 0 0 0 0 eee eee 230 Appendix B Web Client Pre configuration OVERVIEW s 5 4 3 Saal ake tke pew tee ode a a pick a Haar ale he oe a e ab A Sa 237 Prerequisite SOMWAME ensai bes a ed aoe de a wat a a A ahi eRe ae ake a dep eel av ete Beer ew 237 Configuring the Paging File 0 2 0 cece eee 237 Setting QuickTime Preferences 2 0000 cee eee eee eee 240 Setting QuickTime Preferences XP 00 00 ccc eee eee 241 Setting QuickTime Preferences Windows 7 00 00 ee eee ee eee 242 xii VideoEdge NVR 4 2 1 Installtion and User Manual Table of Contents Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting OVGINIOWs feet kota ete beet eee es Kite ened ete ee ee eee ed 245 Assigning an IP Address to a Client PC 00000 cece 246 Troubleshooting Network Connections 00000 e eee eee eee 252 Launching the Windows Command Prompt 00000 0eeeeeaes 253 Troubleshooting with the Ipconfig All Command 00 020 e eee eee 255 Troubleshooting with the Ping Command 00 eee eee eee 257 Troubleshooting with the Tracert Command 202000 eee eens 258 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting OVOGIVIOW 2 ia es wha d dead tee hd ba dedee das Meso dwladae dd tela
234. nsure that the boot disk is a position less than number 8 in the device list The NVR BIOS is only able to boot from one of the first eight disks 5 American Dynamics 291 Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Procedure 26 7 Changing the Disk Boot Order during Live Installer Step Action 1 In the installation summary page click Change and select Booting The Boot Loader Settings page opens Select the Boot Loader Installation tab Click Boot Loader Installation Details Locate the boot disk and select it The boot disk will be highlighted once selected Note You should have noted the disk ID of the book disk earlier in step 11 of Procedure 26 5 Using the YaST Wizard on page 285 If not you can read the file in tmp migration nvr system disk setup It is detailed in the line system disk Click Up until the boot disk is in positioned less than number 8 in the device list Click OK Select Boot from Boot Partition deselect any other selected options Click OK Click Install to proceed with the installation co AN OO End NVR 4 1 to 4 2 1 Migration Failure Recovery 292 Should a failure arise during the upgrade or migration process the following procedure can be used to rollback your NVR to version 4 1 To carry out the rollback procedure you will require the following 1 A system backup file from NVR 4 1 only The backup file must consist of all cameras recording mode set to OFF 2 NVR 4 1 Softwar
235. nte aes dh hfs eee aes Peers dh gi darn arta ate 40 Discovery Pajo sient csc ha fe ae ees bad wa ea Wed View ba eed tepews 40 Camera List Page 1 2 0 teas 41 Alarms Page orrera etd sae eA ceca a eee eda es oe Re eee eee 42 SOJE e aeneae a aaa k E a ai a aa ia Aaa aa a E ee 43 Basic Page sepre ranana ak Meaeadiaek eane SANE E RSE baa Saas 44 Storage Sets Page ees ce eruka i eie a EE A ee eee ee 45 Assign Cameras Page 0 ccc eee 46 Email Aleris ic 22s 2ci44clsneiddtetiuabedddeldwiidddedlaatidddetads 47 Email Alerts Page ses c2sen dnas EEan PER ee Ay ee a Pew Pees eee 48 FINIS iste at ex ni Se arnn peed eee ee eed oe hide eed xe en peed awe ame ee Aaa 49 SuUMMary PAJE arasa eden e bes eee ge dad bee edad eed ede 49 Using the NVR Interface OVEIVIQW sence ee aint caudex at eee VEER EE EE ee adie Mae eae ar al 51 Logging into the NVR Server Web Interface 0 0 00 eee eee 51 victor NVR Configuration Interface 2 0 0 0 aaaea aae 52 Navigating the NVR Interface 000 cee eee eee eee 54 Live Video Menu an2c Raed see an doula eek ees ad eee ee a Bead eben EAN 55 Cameras Menu sees nres bet eet dee pe ee ee we need ae ae 55 Storage Men ss crisi eratua kerin eE ere St a ate A ee we 55 SYStOM MON es rerai ea eae Sv cel aaa sp aera si ea a a E 55 NGIWO MEMU eresian sid irer dae ed ee EA ee ate E ae ee 56 Advanced Menu s sssr esseni taa ia Ena REEE E ee ee 56 Configuring Storage OVENEW tcc ea eet
236. nto the NVR operating system to access the NVR desktop Note It is highly recommended to setup an operator account when prompted in addition to the root user account The root user account should be used for troubleshooting and system OS setup only Procedure 3 11 Setting Up NVR OS User Accounts Step Action 1 In the Password for the Root User account page of the Installer enter a password for the root user caution It is extremely important that you will remember this password If necessary you should write this password down and store it securely 2 Re enter the password in the Confirm Password field 3 Click Next 22 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR 4 If the system does not recognize the password as secure a message opens Click Yes to confirm the use of the weak password and continue or click No to change the password A secure password should contain both upper and lower case letters numbers and special characters Note If the passwords entered into the Password and Confirm Password fields do not match a message opens Re enter the passwords to continue 5 Create an operator user account a Enter the User s Full Name b Enter a Username Note A name is suggested depending on the User s Full Name c Enter a Password d Re enter the password in the Confirm Password field e Click Next Note 1 Ifthe system does not recognize the password as secure a me
237. ntroller S891 ERROR video 5 S H264 0 createStream returned error Camera input 6 is disconnect 21 16 00 49 err device_controller 5891 ERROR device CreateVideoStream caught a CError error Camera input 6 is disconn ug 21 16 00 49 err device_controller S891 ERROR video 0 0 MJPEG 0 createStream returned error Camera input 1 is disconne _ biiir Viewing Event Logs Step Action Select Advanced Select Logs A Tyco Intemational Company Select the Event Logs tab The Event Logs page opens ON Oo Ff To include emergency event logs select the Emergency checkbox To include critical event logs select the Critical checkbox To include error event logs select the Error checkbox To include warning event logs select the Warning checkbox To include info event logs select the Info checkbox To include specific filter text enter the desired filter text in the Filter text textbox 0 Click Apply End Camera Connection Errors The Connection page displays the Camera Connection Errors that have occurred A American Dynamics Logs 203 Logs Figure 19 5 Connection Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Live Video Connection Cameras Camera Connection Errors Storage System Tue Jul 10 13 32 18 2012 eR RR eR eam cee Tue Jul 10 13 32 18 2012 MCC EPC EIR CR CASO Ha ne aa a a hee kecn hh inen te resource debug gstrt
238. nue Note If some of the changes are not successful a summary page of failed updates opens with the failures highlighted in red By hovering over you can view more detailed error information Click OK to continue Figure 8 5 Failed Fields in Batch Edit The following errors were encountered while trying to update the cameras Failed to set the following features on Camera 1 stream 1 codec i stream 1 res T Failed to set the following features on Camera 3 stream 1 codec i stream 1 res i Failed to set the following features on Camera 4 stream 1 codec i stream 1 res i Click Ok to continue End Advanced Camera Configuration There are several camera configuration tabs e General e Image Settings e Function and Stream e Alerts PTZ 5 American Dynamics 89 Camera Configuration 90 These tabs can be accessed by clicking the Setup icon in the Camera List page Each category is described in detail in the following sections of this chapter Configuring General Camera Settings General camera settings that can be easily updated as required These include the camera name password group and storage set The ID Channel Internal IP Address MAC Address and Camera Type fields are for information only and are not configurable Figure 8 6 General Configuration Settings axis 00408c7f4ce7 Axis 210 ID Channel Camera Name axis 00408c7f4ce7 Internal IP Address MAC
239. o Intelligence in the NVR camera settings When Video Intelligence is disabled you will not be able to perform any Video Intelligence searches or set Video Intelligence alarms on the camera However the Video Intelligence alarms defined on a camera are remembered and will become active if Video Intelligence is enabled again for that camera Procedure 10 2 Disabling Video Intelligence for a Camera Step Action 116 Select Cameras from the main menu Select List Click Setup in the camera record where you want to disable camera Video Intelligence The Function amp Streams page opens Select None from the Generate Meta Data dropdown list Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Video Intelligence 5 Click Apply End Video Intelligence Camera Alarms After enabling Video Intelligence on a camera you can define alarm rules that trigger an event Each camera can have any number of independent Video Intelligence rules In each rule you can define the areas in the cameras view that you want to monitor You can name each alarm rule It is best to use descriptive names like Back Door or Conference Room as these names make it easier to identify the alarm rule in the alerts log better than an abstract name You can choose the Video Intelligence type for the rule The areas that you want to monitor in a cameras view are configured in the Camera Alarm Configuration drawing window a live display of the c
240. of a partition a Select the partition in the table and click Resize b Select either Maximum Size Minimum Size or Custom Size and enter the required partition size c Click OK Or To add a new partition a Click Add b Select either Primary Partition or Extended Partition c Select the partition size Select either Maximum Size Minimum Size or Custom Size and enter the required partition size If preferred you can choose an allocated region of the disk by entering a Start Cylinder and an End Cylinder d Select Next If you are creating an extended partition continue to step otherwise continue to step f Click the Format Partition option button Select XFS from the File System dropdown J Q mm Enter the Mount Point for the media partition for example data media1 Select the Fstab Options button Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting j Enter rw noatime nodiratime attr2 nobarrier noquota allocsize 4m in the Arbitrary option value field Note nobarrier should only be used on storage devices connected to disk controllers with battery backed cache k Click OK I Click Finish Or To delete a partition a Select the partition you want to delete b Click Delete c Click Confirm to delete the partition 7 Click Next The Expert Partitioner page opens displaying the changes to be made to the partitions 8 Click Finish The changes are made to the partition
241. om your Client PC For example open your internet browser to see if you can reach a website If you still cannot access the network refer to Troubleshooting Network Connections on page 252 End Procedure 24 2 Assign an IP Address to a Client PC Windows 7 Step Action Click Start in the Windows taskbar Mouse over Network and right click Select Properties The Network and Sharing Center opens 5 American Dynamics 249 Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Figure 24 6 Selecting Network Properties Adobe Captivate 5 Getting Started Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Degeneres Pictures Fm Adobe FrameMaker 10 Computer p Adobe Acrobat X Pro pm Network 22 Microsoft office Word 2007 Open Connect To F iii Map network drive Control Pan Disconnect network drive Devices and Calculator EE Default Programs w vetor Re menage Administrative Tools gt eS WordPad LD Sticky Notes gt All Programs Help and Support Search programs and file Search programs and files 4 Select the primary Local Area Network The Local Area Connection Status pop up displays Figure 24 7 Network Connections lt EE gt Control Panel All Control Panel Items Network and Sharing Center ontrol Panel Control Panel H i g g s n ooo aad View your basic network information and set up connections Change adapter settings le aa See full map lt Ehenge advanced shorii BELIW
242. omain Name Servers Default Gateway RTSP Port NTP Status and NTP Servers LAN Interface Use to configure the available LAN interfaces Each interface provides the option to configure the IP Address allocation LAN IP Address Subnet Mask and IP Broadcast Address If IP Address allocation is set to either None or DHCP you will be unable to edit any of the entry fields The menu will also display the MAC Address of each Network Interface Controller NIC for information purposes DHCP Server Use the DHCP Server page to configure the DHCP Status for each NIC The start and end range of the IP Addresses to be included for each NIC during automatic searches for IP Devices can also be configured Use the DHCP Status page to view active devices which have been assigned an IP address by the NVR when it is acting as a DHCP server WAN Settings Used to configure the NVR for operation on a Wide Area Network In the WAN Settings you can configure the WAN IP Address HTTP Port Secure HTTP Port and the Streaming Configured Port Dynamic Bandwidth Use to configure bandwidth throttling when disabled there is no framedropping or transcoding invoked In the bandwidth throttling settings you can enable Transcode select the number of streams to be transcoded up to four select the Bandwidth Priority Traffic smoothing LAN and WAN bitrate caps Advanced Menu The Advanced Menu has sub menu items Failover Storage Statistics Logs Dark Image Detectio
243. ompliance with the AVC Standard AVC Video and or ii decode AVC video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non commercial activity and or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC video No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA LLC See HTTP MWWW MPEGLA COM 5 American Dynamics 3 VideoEdge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Table of Contents Overview of the VideoEdge NVR NVR Introduction eae ee a ed eee ee ee eee aed ee eae 1 Purpose of the NVR cia cae eo etad pewa eRe ea adeeb ee bebe 4 Oe aden ata ds 1 victor Digital Video Management System 1 0 2 0 aaae 1 Getting Started with VideoEdge NVR 0 0 00 tenes 2 System Specifications OVERVIEW siticyea waive nate ne 24 a ae Oe E ches Wale y Rete eels 5 System Specifications 20000 ce eee 5 System Specifications for Bundled Packages 0 0 cece eee 5 Recommended System Specifications for Software Only 0005 6 Installing the VideoEdge NVR OVEIMOW sce Wh Sage e ta Vela ae ea ded bene d Cae vai ale ae eee eee 7 NVR Hardware and Software Bundle 0000 tee 7 NVR Software Only Bundle 0 0 0 cece eee 7 Installing the NVR Hardware and Software Bundle 0000 eee eee 7 Initial Boot Up of the NVR 2 2 2 00 20 te eee 8 Logging into the NVR Desktop 1 0 0 0 0c cece eee 1
244. on 1 Select the required menu item from the main menu on the left hand side of the page Figure 4 4 Main Menu Live Video Cameras Storage System Network Advanced Hybrid The selected menu item expands to display a sub menu list of items 2 Select the required item from the sub menu list The relevant configuration settings are displayed in the main pane of the window 3 Optional Select the tabs at the top of the main pane to navigate between pages Figure 4 5 Tabs on Main Pane Storage Sets l Add Storage Set End 5 American Dynamics 57 Using the NVR Interface 58 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Configuring Storage Overview NVRs can require a tremendous amount of storage space depending on the number of cameras codec resolution and frame rates recording modes and the duration for which you wish to preserve video recordings At the outset of your use of the NVR system you will need to have storage configured to record data From time to time you may find it necessary to replace or adda storage device to produce a greater capacity for video storage This chapter describes how to configure storage devices that are physically connected to the NVR and storage devices that are networked to the NVR over a TCP IP connection There are two main storage configuration types basic and advanced configuration Basic configuration is the default configuration type where all storage
245. on the system the default system partitions will already be configured The system partitions are needed for regular operation of the operating system and NVR application The default system partitions defined are in Table 3 1 below Each partition size in the table is the required value If it is not the first time the NVR 4 2 1 software has been installed in the system partitions need to be deleted and recreated refer to 5 American Dynamics 13 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Configuring System Partitions on a Previously Configured Device on page 272 Table 3 1 Default Partitions Required for NVR Size GB Type FS Type Mount Point 16 Linux swap Swap swap 476 Linux native XFS var 8 Linux native Ext3 Procedure 3 7 Configuring Media Partitions on the First Media Drive on the NVR Step Action 2 Select Custom Partitioning for experts The Expert Partitioner page opens Figure 3 2 Expert Partitioner Page Expert Partitioner YaST g Expert Partitioner This view shows all partitions of the selected hard disk more System View me 3 v S techcomms adnvr Overview Partitions a Sxard Disks gt sda 3 Hard Disk dev sdb In the Suggested Partioning page of the wizard click Create Partition Setup Device size imo be 2 volume Management l i Crypt Files an oe Device Mapper j I nrs dev sdb1 16 11 GB jdev sdb2 50 34 GB dev sdb3 8 06 GB z B BTRFS s E twers bs R
246. oot device is out of range The range is limited by BIOS to the first 8 devices For further information refer to Procedure 26 7 Changing the Disk Boot Order during Live Installer on page 292 13 Click Install A popup window opens asking you to confirm installation 5 American Dynamics 287 Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Figure 26 11 Confirm Installation Popup Confirm Installation All information required for the base installation is now complete If you continue now partitions on your hard disk will be modified according to the installation settings in the previous dialogs Go back and check the settings if you are unsure 14 Click Install 15 The installation process begins A progress bar is displayed at the bottom of the page Once Installation is complete a popup window opens prompting you to reboot the computer Figure 26 12 Reboot Popup Reboot the computer without the Live CD in the drive to continue the installation Note that the CD cannot be ejected now You can eject it after the Live system shuts down or by selecting Hard Disk in the boot menu of the Live CD ok 16 Click OK The YaST Wizard closes and prior to rebooting the upgrade tool reopens End Completing the Upgrade Once the YaST wizard has closed the upgrade tool automatically reopens and commences the final stage of the upgrade restoring NVR 4 1 application and OS settings including camera settin
247. or each object that enters the region even if the objects move into the region at the same time unlike motion detection that generates one event b Abandoned Removed Used to find changes to the background of a scene in a region of interest for example use it to detect when a stationary object was placed moved or removed Draw the region of interest that contains all of the area you want to search for changes c Direction Used to detect objects moving in a certain direction through a region of interest for example a car travelling the wrong way on a road It is best to use a thin region of interest to detect the direction of an object d Linger Used to detect objects lingering in an area of interest An object is lingering if it is mostly stationary e Exit Used to detect objects exiting a camera view through a region of interest for example a doorway or threshold It is best to draw the region of interest around the doorway or threshold to include areas in which the door can move or objects can be seen for example glass This will exclude objects that can be seen in the region of interest but does not pass through it f Enter Used to detect objects entering a camera view through a region of interest for example a doorway or threshold It is best to draw the region of interest around the doorway or threshold to include areas in which the door can move or objects can be seen for example glass This will exclude objects tha
248. orage Statistics Logs Dark Image Detection Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Monitor Output Tours Monitor Output Presets Hybrid Audit Trail Admin Audit Trail Date Time Category ail Details User Client Machine Jul 23 2012 15 19 04 Software upgrade Jul 23 2012 15 19 36 Software upgrade Jul 30 2012 10 51 31 Software upgrade Jul 30 2012 10 51 52 Software upgrade Aug 03 2012 12 25 35 Software upgrade Aug 03 2012 12 27 33 Software upgrade Aug 03 2012 12 27 41 Software upgrade Software upgrade failed Software upgrade failed Software upgrade failed Software upgrade failed Software upgrade failed Software upgrade failed Software upgrade failed admin jp 192 168 200 164 MAC 00 10 18 55 5a 38 Host userHostName admin iP 192 168 200 164 MAC 00 10 18 55 5a 38 Host userHostName admin iP 192 168 200 164 MAC 00 10 18 55 5a 38 Host userHostName admin ip 192 168 200 164 MAC 00 10 18 55 5a 38 Host userHostName admin iP 192 168 200 164 MAC 00 10 18 55 5a 38 Host userHostName admin iP 192 168 200 164 MAC 00 10 18 55 5a 38 Host userHostName admin iP 192 168 200 164 MAC 00 10 18 55 5a 38 Procedure 19 6 Viewing the Audit Trail Step Action 206 Select Advanced Select Logs Select the Audit Trail tab The Audit Trail page opens End Video Edge NVR 4 2
249. orting the Camera List 0 0 0 0 c cee tees 79 Filtering the Camera List 0 0 0 cee 79 Manually Adding an IP Camera or Encoder annuau aaaeei eee eaes 80 Adding Cameras Using Auto Discovery 0 00 c eee eee 82 Removing a Camera o es ssaa draa Erna na aa E EA eee eee eee 84 Camera Configuration OVEIVIOWS erir ee EA apa aae need bet dee a a a a de need 85 Basic Camera Configuration assau aaa eee 85 Batch Camera Configuration saasaa aaaeeeaa 86 Advanced Camera Configuration asnasa aaa aaee 89 Configuring General Camera Settings nananana 90 5 American Dynamics vii Table of Contents Edita Camera Name 0 000 ccc tee eee 90 Change the Password Group Assigned to an IP Camera 91 Change a Camera s Storage Set 1 0 0 0 000 eae 91 Configure Camera Image Settings 0 0 0c ae 92 Configure Camera Function and Stream Settings 00 eee eae 93 Set the Camera Recording Status 00 0 95 Set a Camera Recording Retention Period 200000000 96 Configuring Camera Audio Settings 0020s 96 Configuring Camera Stream Settings 0 2000 e eee eee 97 Configuring Alert Buffer Settings 0000 cece eee 98 Configuring Senso S eared beta eedad dei deieiae etal biviawbbidderdas 99 Dry Contact Sensors 0 eee 99 Configuring PTZ Settings 0 0 ce teas 100 Enable Disable PTZ Fu
250. ory Analytics Alerts Camera Malfunction Camera s Not Recording Failover Event Motion Detection Alerts No Storage Active on Unit Reboot Notification Storage Alerts Failed to Read Storage Config System Alerts SEIS Cancel Select the New Recipient Email Address option button Enter the recipient s email address in the field 5 American Dynamics 211 Email Alerts Or If the user is already receiving notifications you can choose the user s email address from the Use Recipient Email address dropdown menu Select the Alert Categories using the checkboxes 7 Click Save 8 Verify that the email address has been added to the recipient list for each alert category You can check by viewing recipients for each alert category listed in the table on the Email Alerts page refer to Figure 20 1 Alert Category Recipients on page 212 Figure 20 1 Alert Category Recipients ALERT CATEGORY RECIPIENT LIST ENABLED example1 tyco com example2 tyco com example3 tyco com example4 tyco com exampleS tyco com 9 To send a test email to a recipient list select the alert you wish to test an click Test 10 Once you have the email recipients configured you need to enable alerts Refer to Enabling and Disabling Email Alerts on page 212 End Enabling and Disabling Email Alerts Once recipient addresses have been entered and alert categories assigned you can configure which email alerts should be enabled for each r
251. ou can see several entries of different switches and or routers that the trace packet went through before reaching its destination Figure 24 17 Using the Tracert Command 5 lt Ci i m C Windows system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 76811 Copyright lt c gt 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Itracert wuww example com Tracing route to www example com 192 00 43 101 lover a maximum of 30 hops lt i ms lt i ms 16 51 53 253 lt 1 lt i m 108 51 50 250 1 ms lt i ms 38 164 255 62 static virginmedia com 62 255 164 4 9 ms 11 16 ms manc lam 4 tenge13 2245 network virginmedia net 62 252 216 2221 5 ms 13 184 242 153 6 9 ms manc bb 1b ae network virginmedia net 82 15 ms manc core 2b xe 111 network virginmedia net 2 286 249 1 7 40 manc bb 1La ae network virginmedia net 62 253 187 1771 8 1 ms ms ms 212 187 136 125 9 ae 4 4 ebri Londoni Level3 net 4 697 133 1602 16 vlani 2 ebr2 London1 Level3 net 4 69 143 96 f 11 s ae 42 42 ebri NewYork i Level3 net 4 69 137 76 12 s s ms ae 4 4 ebri NewYork2 Level3 net 4 69 141 181 s S ms ae 3 3 ebr2 Washingtoni Level3 net 4 699 132 891 ae 72 72 csw2 Washington Level3 net 4 69 134 1 ae 22 70 car2 Washingtoni Level3 net 4 69 149 6 INTERNET CO car2 Washingtoni Level3 net 4 59 14 43 16 any icann org 192 6 43 16 Trace complete C gt 3 If you see Request timed out it mean
252. ove Used to read documentation in PDF format Configuring the Paging File You can improve the display of streaming video by setting the Paging File size to be managed by windows This is the default setting If you have modified this setting and you are experiencing any problems viewing video via the NVR Web Interface you can perform the following steps to restore this setting A American Dynamics 237 Appendix B Web Client Pre configuration 238 Procedure 23 1 Configuring the Paging File XP Step Action Click Start in the Windows taskbar Right click My Computer and select Properties Select the Advanced tab In the Performance section click Settings Select the Advanced tab In the Virtual Memory section click Change oo fF WON Figure 23 1 Change Virtual Memory Performance Options Visual Effects Advanced Joata Execution Prevention Processor scheduling By default the computer is set to use a greater share of processor time to run your programs Adjust for best performance of O Background services Memory usage By default the computer is set to use a greater share of memory to run your programs Adjust for best performance of Programs O System cache Virtual memory A paging file is an area on the hard disk that Windows uses as if it were RAM Total paging file size for all drives 2046 MB 7 In the Paging file size for selected drive section select System managed
253. own Page American Dynamics A Tyco Internationa Company Shutdown Live Video NVR Services are currently Running Cameras Select function Storage Restart NVR Services Stop NVR Services System Reboot NVR Shutdown NVR Network Advanced Failover Storage Statistics Logs Dark Image Detection Email Alerts PTZ Serial Ports Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Monitor Output Tours Monitor Output Presets Hybrid A Tyco International Company Restart NVR Services The Shutdown page allows you to restart the NVR services this will restart the NVR software such as recording and playback services however it will not restart the operating system Restarting NVR services is faster than rebooting the NVR A American Dynamics 169 System Shutdown and Reset Factory Defaults Procedure 16 1 Restart NVR Services Step Action Select Advanced 2 Select Shutdown The Shutdown page opens Select Restart NVR Services option button 4 Click Apply End Stop NVR Services NVR Services can be stopped permanently By stopping NVR services you can release resources and maximise system performance of some SUSE features Note It is highly recommended that you stop NVR Services before configuring storage Procedure 16 2 Stop NVR Services Step Action Select Advanced 2 Select Shutdown The Shutdown page opens Select Stop NVR Services option button 4 Click A
254. pply A message box opens This will stop NVR Services Are you sure you want to continue 5 Click Yes 170 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual System Shutdown and Reset Factory Defaults The confirmation message NVR Services have stopped The NVR will not record or display live media until the services are restarted displays and the NVR services are disabled Note When you have stopped NVR services use the Restart NVR Services option Procedure 16 1 Restart NVR Services to restart the services End Reboot the NVR The Shutdown page allows you to reboot the NVR this will cause the NVR to go through a soft reboot when applied Procedure 16 3 Reboot the NVR Step Action Select Advanced 2 Select Shutdown The Shutdown page opens Select Reboot NVR option button Click Apply End Shutdown the NVR The Shutdown page allows you to shutdown the NVR this will cause the NVR to fully power down when applied Procedure 16 4 Shutdown the NVR Step Action 1 Select Advanced 2 Select Shutdown The Shutdown page opens 5 American Dynamics 171 System Shutdown and Reset Factory Defaults Select Shutdown NVR option button 4 Click Apply Note To restart the NVR after it has been shut down it must be manually turned on at the server End Reset Factory Defaults The Reset Factory Defaults functionality allows you to revert several of the NVR s characteristics
255. ps maximum with continuous recording on either Fibre or iSCSI storage e 64 Cameras with a total network bandwidth of 400Mbps maximum with motion based recording on either Fibre or iSCSI storage End Overview of AD Fibre RAID Storage FRS FES Fibre RAID Storage is an NVR extended storage device acting as a Fibre Direct Attached Storage DAS or iSCSI device As a Fibre device a Fibre Host Bus Adapter HBA must be installed in the NVR and uses Fibre Optic cable connection As an iSCSI device 3rd Gigabit Ethernet NIC must be installed in the NVR and uses CAT 5e 6 Ethernet connection This is already installed in the NVR 4 2 1 servers 5 American Dynamics 227 Appendix A Storage 228 Second generation American Dynamics iSCSI and Fibre RAID Storage The second generation American Dynamics iSCSI and Fibre RAID Storage solutions are designed for high performance recording devices They are secure and highly scalable storage solutions that provide SAN storage for virtually any network and application The new Rack Mount models are available in a variety of configurations and capacities There are iSCSI RAID 4Gb Fibre RAID and Expansion models which have been uniquely designed to utilize the same 3U chassis These storage solutions come standard with redundant power supplies and fans and nearly every component is hot swappable including sixteen lockable hot swap drives An optional battery backup module is also available for
256. quire and how to configure it to maximize the overall performance To configure storage on an NVR you must consider 1 Storage e The type of storage to be used Internal HDDs iSCSI external storage Fiber Optic external storage USB external hard drives etc The storage configuration RAID 0 RAID1 RAID 5 RAID 6 JBOD etc 2 Cameras e Total number of cameras Type of cameras make model resolution codec FPS compression recording mode The file size of the camera s video stream that is to be recorded 3 The required recording retention period for stored video Below details some different storage usage examples and are compared to the NVR 4 1 storage model e Example 1 Using a 20TB RAID set NVR 4 1 20TB RAID set is divided into 10 2TB logical volumes There are 10 storage devices seen on the NVR NVR 4 2 1 20TB RAID set can be added as 1 20TB volume The NVR will recognise this as 1 storage device that can be used for storage Alternatively you can create 10 2TB logical partitions The NVR will recognise this as 10 storage devices that can be used for storage NVR 4 2 1 Migrated from 4 1 20 TB RAID set is still divided into 10 2TB logical volumes Each 2TB volume is represented as 14 storage devices The NVR will recognise this as 140 storage devices that can be used for storage Example 2 Configuration Set up NVR 4 1 Storage configuration is performed using the admin web GUI NVR 4 2 1 Storage con
257. quivalents as applicable or iii refund a pro rated portion of the license fee paid for such Software less depreciation based on a five year life expectancy and terminate this EULA provided in each case that Tyco is notified in writing of all warranty problems during the applicable warranty period Any replacement item will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period No remedy is provided for failure of the Software if such failure is the result of accident abuse alteration or misapplication with respect to the Software or any hardware on which it is loaded Warranty service or assistance is provided at the original point of purchase 7 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY amp EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES a LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL TYCO S AGGREGATE LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LIABILITY FOR NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY BREACH OF CONTRACT MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER CONTRACT OR TORT CLAIMS ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THIS EULA OR THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE EXCEED THE GREATER OF USD 5 00 OR THE AMOUNT OF FEES YOU PAID TO TYCO OR ITS RESELLER FOR THE SOFTWARE THAT GIVES RISE TO SUCH LIABILITY BECAUSE AND TO THE EXTENT THAT SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY ABOVE THESE MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU AS American Dynamics 299 End User License Agreement EULA 300 b EXCLUSION OF OTHER DAMAGES UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TYCO OR ANY OF ITS RESELLERS OR LICENSORS BE LIAB
258. r but the frames were removed before being written due to buffer overflow FPS Actual FPS recorded for this camera for this session Kbps Calculated Kbps of this camera for this session 5 American Dynamics 191 Operational Statistics Field Description Avg Queue Latency Average time between when frame is received and when inserted into queue seconds Avg Disk Latency Average time from queue insertion to disk write seconds Max Disk Latency Maximum time from queue insertion to disk write seconds Last Add Time of last added frame in this session Last Drop or Miss Time of last frame dropped missed if applicable N A indicates no frame dropped missed Table 18 2 Total Recording Statistics Field Description Active Streams Current total number of active streams Frames Total number of frames for all cameras Missing Total number of missing frames across all cameras Network Total number of frames dropped between cameras and NVR lost over network Pipeline Total number of frames dropped from buffer inserted into buffer but not written Dropped Total number of dropped frames across all cameras percent dropped of total frames Average FPS Average FPS of all cameras Aggregate Kbps Aggregate Kbps across all cameras Average Kbps Average Kbps across all cameras Procedure 18 2 Viewing the Recording Statistics S
259. r a Camera Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List Click Setup in the camera record where you want to disable camera Video Intelligence The Function amp Streams page opens Select None from the Generate Meta Data dropdown list Click Apply End Motion Detection Alarms 106 After enabling Motion Detection on a camera you can set alarm rules that trigger an event Each camera can have up to 10 independent motion alarm rules defined Each rule has an associated region of interest In each region of interest you can define the areas in the cameras view that you want to monitor You can name each alarm rule It is best to use descriptive names like Back Door or Conference Room as these names make it easier to identify the alarm in victor reports better than an abstract name The areas that you want to monitor in a cameras view are configured in the Camera Alarm Configuration drawing window a live display of the camera view To determine the areas of the camera view that you want monitored you need to draw on the window Use the drawing tools to draw on the Camera Alarm Configuration window The status of each Video Intelligence alarm highlighted in the Status field There are three alarm states e Red Alarm is disabled The alarm can be disabled via the Enabled option button Yellow Alarm is enabled however the recording mode set for the camera does NOT support alarms so the alar
260. r you om x m Cancel Browse 253 Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Figure 24 11 Windows Command Prompt Command Prompt 2 5 x Procedure 24 4 Launch the Windows Command Prompt Windows 7 Step Action Click Start in the Windows taskbar 2 Type cmd in the Search Programs and Files Field The Command Prompt Icon displays under the heading Programs 3 Double click the Command Prompt Icon The command prompt window opens 254 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting Figure 24 12 Search for Command Prompt Programs 1 E cmd Files 8 F 14139_vzdiag E 14139_system media sql AMECore5 5All_x64 proxy media sql AMECore5 5All proxy _ media sql AdobeCaptivate5 5Core proxy J See more results Shut down gt mA Noe Se Figure 24 13 Windows Command Prompt Bi Waoane ro Microsoft Windows Version 6 1 76611 Copyright lt c 200 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved CEN End Troubleshooting with the Ipconfig All Command The ipconfig all command allows you to see all of the IP addresses that are used by your client PC You will need this command to determine the IP addresses used by your NICs The NIC connects your client PC to a TCP IP network 5 American Dynamics 255 Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting 256 Procedure 24 5 Use the Ipconfig
261. ra Image Settings Step Action Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List Click Setup in the camera record for which you want to configure camera settings The Function amp Streams page opens Select the Image Settings tab Adjust the Video Processing Amp image settings The available settings and value ranges are dependent on the camera make model The Video Processing Amp image settings include a Video Standard Select the required video processing standard from the dropdown list b Rotate Image Select the angle you want to rotate the image from the dropdown list Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual s gt a 0 2090 Camera Configuration Brightness Select the brightness value from the dropdown list Contrast Select the contrast value from the dropdown list Hue Select the hue value from the dropdown list Sharpness Select the sharpness value from the dropdown list White Balance Select the white balance control value from the dropdown list Back Light Compensation Select the back light compensation value from the dropdown list Image Interlaced Select the image interlacing setting from the dropdown list 6 Adjust the Lens Sensor settings The types of settings and value ranges available are camera make model dependent The Lens Sensor settings include a oO aooo Lens Focus Select a focus for the camera from the dropdown list Lens Auto Focus Select the checkbox to e
262. raffic Smoothing is set to a value less than or equal to the LAN and WAN bitrate caps Usually WAN connections have lower bandwidth than LAN connections if the WAN bandwidth is less than the default value of 150 Mbps Traffic Smoothing will have little to no effect When Preserve Framerate and Allow any throttle type are selected the Transcode Limit dropdown also displays This allows you to limit the number of transcoded streams between 1 and 4 to best suit your CPU s capabilities Traffic Smoothing Only Allows the ability to pace the traffic leaving the NVR to individual clients without incurring framedrop or transcode This smooths bursts of traffic which may cause issues for some consumer grade NICs consuming this data Procedure 15 16 Selecting Traffic Smoothing Only Step Action Select Network 2 Select Dynamic Bandwidth The Dynamic Bandwidth page opens 3 Click the Traffic Smoothing Only option button The area behind the option buttons changes to yellow indicating a change has been made The Traffic Smoothing fields display Figure 15 8 Traffic Smoothing Fields Traffic Smoothing Client 300 Mbps Stream 75 Mbps 4 To edit the Client and Stream fields select the current values Update the Client and Stream values as required The field backgrounds change to yellow indicating a change has been made 5 Click Save Confirmation messages display End 164 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual
263. ras general DHCP server to allocate IP addresses of computers on a private network DHCP on etho DHCP Status v LAN v WAN A DHCP cannot be enabled on this interface unless the IP address allocation method is set v Bandwidth Throttling to STATIC on the LAN Interface page DHCP Cameras Discovery Configure Alarms Storage Configure Email alerts Configure Finish Summary Procedure 3 22 DHCP Server Settings Step Action 1 To edit the following fields e DHCP Status e Start Range e End Range e Subnet e Netmask for each NIC select Edit next to the setting Edit the setting and click OK D Continue to advance to the next page Continue to Procedure 3 23 Discovery ettings Note For further information on DHCP Server settings refer to Procedure 15 9 Editing the DHCP Server Settings on page 156 End 5 American Dynamics 39 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Cameras This section describes the cameras stage of the Setup Wizard including the Discovery Configure and Alarms pages Discovery Page The Discovery page is used to discover and add IP cameras from selected networks Figure 3 19 Discovery Page Welcome Select interface eth 192 168 100 42 MESNE Setup Available unused licenses 128 Total 128 v Failover Avaliable unused inputs 128 Total 128 System General Roles DISCOVERED DEVICE LIST 1 FOUND Network IP
264. rd group information is also transferred to allow the Failover NVR to communicate with the cameras User account information is not transferred therefore when prompted to enter a username and password you must use the Failover NVR username and password An NVR that is going to be used as a Failover NVR must be installed and configured in the same way as you would for a normal NVR You need to configure media folders and storage sets It is important to note when you are configuring storage for an NVR Failover server the storage configuration must be able to support recording of any camera configurations set up on any of the NVR s it is monitoring Failover monitoring resumes only after the damaged NVR is replaced and the Failover server is returned to normal operation If email alerts are activated for NVR Failover three emails will be sent during the takeover process The first email is a notification that failover mode will be activated The NVR then needs to restart which prompts the second notification the server has rebooted when the NVR services are being A American Dynamics 177 NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates 178 shut down The third email is prompted when the server restarts an activating failover mode notification Note The Failover NVR is intended to act as a redundant standby for the NVRs it monitors The Failover NVR is not intended to manage cameras on its own because these cameras would
265. re Username admin Password VIDEO edge23 The Setup Wizard opens at the Welcome page 13 Click Start to begin the Setup Wizard The first step is to apply your licence Apply the NVR 4 2 1 licence file and click Continue For further information on how to apply a license refer to Procedure 3 14 Configuring the Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Setup Page on page 28 Continue through the Setup Wizard until you reach the Network section of the wizard Open the VideoOSDetails xxxxxxxx file and use the network settings to help you configure the following Domain Name e Domain Name Servers e Default Gateway RTSP Port e NTP Status NTP Servers e Network Interfaces e DHCP Configuration Complete the remaining stages of the Setup Wizard When complete the NVR Configuration Interface opens at the Camera List page Select System Select Backup Restore The Backup page opens Select the Restore tab The Restore page opens Click Browse Navigate to and select the NVR backup file VideoConfBackup xxxxxxXxxXxx zip Note You must use the zip file and not an individual sub file Click Upload Backup You will be prompted for media recovery click Yes Media recovery will take approximately 1 minute per 90 100GB of Storage Status messages will display informing you of current progress Once complet
266. ream to perform Video Intelligence is CIF 320 x 240 resolution MJPEG at 7 frames per second The NVR requires at least 320 x 180 resolution and more than 4 frames per second to perform Video Intelligence activities Procedure 10 1 Enabling Video Intelligence for a Camera Step Action 1 Select Cameras from the main menu 115 Video Intelligence Select List Click Setup in the camera record for which you want to enable Video Intelligence The Function amp Streams page opens Note You can also enable Video Intelligence from the Camera List refer to Procedure 8 1 Editing Basic Camera Settings via the Camera List on page 85 Set the camera Record Status to a setting that supports Video Intelligence Q Recording Normal Off Alarm On or Recording Always with Alarm On Select Video Intelligence from the Generate Meta Data dropdown list Note If an error message opens the NVR cannot detect a suitable stream from the camera to support Video Intelligence You will need to change the Codec Image Resolution or FPS of one of your camera s streams to settings that are compatible with Video Intelligence refer to Table 10 1 Click Apply To create a Video Intelligence alarm refer to Procedure 10 3 Creating a Video Intelligence Camera Alarm on page 118 End Disable Video Intelligence for a Camera If you do not want Video Intelligence activities carried out on a camera you can disable Vide
267. region of interest the entire camera view will be used as the region of interest Figure 9 3 Camera Alarm Configuration Drawing Window Draw Style Brush Size FreeDraw e 4x4 Polygon 3 8x8 E Rectangle CI 9 Select the Yes option button for the Enabled field to enable the alarm 10 Use the Size slider to determine the percentage of the region of interest with activity present for the alarm to be triggered The higher the percentage of the region of interest selected the lower the number of motion detection results triggered for the alarm A setting of 0 will trigger an alarm for any size motion 11 Enter the Duration secs that there is sustained activity in the region of interest before the alarm is triggered You can enter values between 0 default and 600 A value of 0 seconds will trigger an alarm for motion of any duration 12 Select the Direction from the dropdown list that the center of the activity area of motion must move in order to trigger the alarm If you select ANY it will trigger an alarm for movement in any direction Ay American Dynamics 109 Motion Detection 13 Select Save End Editing a Motion Detection Camera Alarm You can make changes to camera alarm settings if required for example you can change the region of interest the percentage of the region of interest that requires activity present the duration of activity or the direction of movement Procedure 9 4 Editing a
268. rest b Wipeout Amount Changed The percentage of the region of interest that must change before an alarm is triggered Adjust to look for either a larger or smaller change in the region c Wipeout Within secs Time frame within which the change must occur in order to trigger the alarm A setting of 0 seconds represents instantaneous change Direction a Overlap The amount of a detected object that must be in the region of interest while moving in the specified direction for an alarm to be triggered b Direction This is the general direction the object must move in to trigger an alarm You can choose North South East or West c Traversal Time This is the maximum amount of time which an object can take to traverse most of the region before the alarm is triggered This is to exclude objects that move too slow Linger a Overlap The amount of detected object that must be in the region of interest while lingering for an alarm to be triggered Use a higher setting to avoid detecting objects lingering nearby b Linger Time The minimum amount of time an object lingers before the alarm is triggered Exit a Overlap The amount of detected object that must be in the region of interest when the object leaves the scene for an alarm to be triggered The object must appear in the scene while being outside the region of interest by the same amount For best results select a higher overlap setting Enter a Overlap
269. revent premature data culling as the amount of space for vaulted media is limited ensuring there is enough space for normal media storage When you are assigning media as vaulted and if there is not enough storage space in the quota allocated to store the media as vaulted media a warning message opens and you cannot assign the media as vaulted You will need to increase the vault media quota or delete vaulted media Procedure 5 4 Setting a Vaulted Media Quota Step Action 1 Select the Storage menu 2 Select Basic Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Configuring Storage The Basic Storage Configuration page opens Figure 5 1 Click Edit Enter the required protected media quota as a percentage of the total space available in the Vault Media Quota field 5 Click Save End Advanced Storage Configuration The Advanced Storage Configuration options allow you to be flexible in setting up the storage on the NVR You can spread media folders and cameras across storage sets to achieve higher system performance due to a lower total data rate required to record to each storage device By default there is one storage set created on the NVR It initially contains all media devices detected by the NVR and are available to view through the Basic Storage Configuration page Once a media folder on a storage device is enabled for storage in the Basic Storage Configuration page the media folder is available for advanced conf
270. rican Dynamics website Once you receive the licence file you can then apply the permanent licence to your NVR The NVR has optional licensable features consisting of e Additional cameras beyond base models e Analytics channels A American Dynamics 141 Licensing the NVR Figure 14 1 Licensing page American Dynamics A Tyco Internat Live Video Cameras Storage System General Roles Templates Backup Restore Update Software PTZ Serial Protocols Network Advanced Hybrid onal Company Licensing License Status License Type Temporary No of Cameras 128 No of Analytic Cameras 8 Time Remaining 22 Days 14 Hours 52 Minutes 12 Seconds Apply License Select your permanent license below License File Apply Permanent License Software Service Agreement Configure expire notifications Change Message Edit Contacts Set SMTP Server Send Test Message Upgrades To upgrade please contact your American Dynamics sales associate quoting your NVR Host ID available below Generate Host ID Licensing the NVR This section details the procedures involved in licencing the NVR 142 Generate a Host ID A Tyco Intemational Company When it is time to renew your NVR Licence or upgrade your software the Generate Host ID tool is used to generate a Host ID specific to your NVR which should be entered on the VideoEdge 4 2 registration page on the American Dynamics website The
271. ries including system alerts storage alerts motion detection alerts analytics alerts camera malfunction reboot notification camera s not recording no storage active on unit failed to read storage config and failover event 7 Summary a Configured settings can be saved to a template file settings to be saved can be selected using check boxes they include camera settings storage settings user information network settings email settings and failover settings b Setup is completed by selecting Finish Accessing the Setup Wizard Accessing the NVR Web Interface for the first time will initialize the Setup Wizard You can use the VideoEdge Administrator icon located on the NVR desktop or login via a remote client caution The VideoEdge Administrator icon has been added for convenience Firefox is not a supported browser for use with the NVR Web Interface Apart from this stage of installation and configuration Internet Explorer must be used as the browser to access the NVR Web Interface Procedure 3 13 Opening the NVR Setup Wizard Step Action 1 Login to the NVR configuration interface To login double click the VideoEdge Administrator icon on the SUSE desktop OR Open a web browser from a remote client PC and enter the IP address 10 10 10 10 This is the default IP address The browser opens and automatically connects to the Setup Wizard Setup Wizard displays after installation when the Web Interface is accessed unt
272. rom the File system dropdown menu n Select the Mount Partition option button o Enter the Mount Point for the disk p Select the Fstab Options button q Enter nofail rw noatime nodiratime attr2 nobarrier noquota allocsize 4m in the Arbitrary option value field Note nobarrier should only be used on storage devices connected to disk controllers with battery backed cache r Click OK Note Each Mount Point should have a unique name however it is good practice to use a folder structure naming convention for example mount point 1 data mediat mount point 2 data media2 mount point 3 data media3 etc s Click Finish t Click Next The Expert Partitioner Summary displays a list of the changes that will be made to the NVR partitions u Click Finish The Perform Installation page opens and the disk partition for the new storage device is created Configure the NVR to allow the new disk to be used for storage a Open a web browser b Enter the IP address of the NVR into the URL field The NVR login dialog box opens c Enter the Administrators User name and Password Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix A Storage User name admin Default Password VIDEO edge23 d Select Storage from the main menu e Select Basic The Basic Storage Configuration page opens f Locate the new storage device in the summary table and select the checkbox in the storage device record g Click Add
273. s Internet My Documents Mozilla Firefox e Fe My Recent Documents gt hg E mail Microsoft Office Outlook 2 My Pictures vxclient 2 My Music E Notepad Adobe FrameMaker 8 Open Explore Search for Computers ye Adobe Acrobat 8 Standard Map Network Drive Disconnect Network Drive SQL Server Configuration e Connect To Manager Show on Desktop Printers and F Cx Alert Console _ __ All Programs gt Gonos amassamy JO 4 Locate your Local Area Connection Figure 24 2 Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help EJ EE i JO search E Folders FF Address Network Connections Go Name Type Status Device Name Network Tasks G Dial up g g g E eea anan medion R Sprint Mobile Broadband Pantech Dial up Disconnected Firewalled Conexant HDA D110 MD Change Windows Firewall settings LANor High Speed Internet gt es L Wireless Network Connection LAN or High Speed Inter Disabled Firewalled Dell Wireless 1390 WLAN iW 2 1394 Connection LAN or High Speed Inter Connected Firewalled 1394 Net Adapter A LAN or High Speed Inter Connected Firewalled Broadcom Netxtreme 57 sone WALL Witual Adapter LAN or High Speed Inter Connected Firewalled SonicWALL VPN Adapter Personal Area Network B Control Panel Bluetooth Network Connection Personal Area Network Disconnected Firewalled
274. s End System Disk Recovery VideoEdge NVR Should the NVR s system disk fail or the system disk becomes corrupt the following procedure should be used for its recovery You will need the following items A Licence file for the NVR 2 A system backup file from NVR 4 2 only Note You must have carried out a backup procedure after all NVR configuration was completed at time of install Procedure 3 30 Completing the NVR Setup on page 49 or Procedure 17 3 Creating a Configuration Backup File on page 181 This is a zip file which when expanded contains two files One of the files is the NVR backup information Named VideoConfBackup xxxxxxxxxxx zip The other is a text file detailing Network and storage mount information This text file VideoOSDetails xxxxxxxx zip is required to complete the recovery procedure 5 American Dynamics 275 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting 276 Figure 25 13 Backup Information Files gO gt VideoConfBackup bellvpcl00 65Cams_ContinuousREC_MD_LOW_MIPEG_25FPS 5 Search VideoConfBackup bel1vpci00 Ft Favorites Q Back to Desktop act all files Name ype Compressed size HE Desktop _ VideoConfBackup bellvpcl100 y2012 m06 d09 h12 m33 s16 e 2 476 KB B Downloads _ VideoOSDetails bellvpc100 y2012 m06 d09 h12 m33 s16 e 3 KB 3 A replacement disk greater than the existing system disk if applicable 4 NVR 4 2 1 Software CD or USB drive Procedure 25 10 Vid
275. s occur Failover Event Sent when a failover is detected The IP address of the NVR which has failed will be included Note In order to use the email notification feature you must have the IP address of an SMTP switch ora mail server ask your IT administrator for details Advance Preparation Prior to configuring email alerts you must ensure that you have a valid Domain Name and Default Gateway configured in the network settings of the NVR network A American Dynamics 209 Email Alerts Procedure 20 1 Advance Preparation for Email Alerts Step Action Select Network 2 Select General The Network General page opens 3 To edit the Domain Name select the current value Update the Domain Name as required The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 To edit the Default Gateway select the current value Update the Default Gateway as required The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 5 Click Save A validation message displays Note The NVR will send notifications to email addresses sharing its own domain Additionally it can send notifications to email addresses in other domains provided those domains SMTP servers have allowed incoming emails from the NVR s domain Owners of email addresses in other domains should contact their email administrator to ensure they will be able to receive alert notifications from the NVR s domain The
276. s that tracert was unable to contact the NVR at the address you typed You should contact your network administrator to confirm the IP address for the NVR 4 If the tracert is unable to contact the network for the NVR IP address for example the trace request times out at 192 168 200 4 when you typed an address of 192 168 10 45 then the problem might be with a network device other than the NVR You can show the tracert result to your network administrator to help diagnose the problem Note If you are still experiencing connectivity issues then there are some other items you can troubleshoot 5 American Dynamics 259 Appendix C Networking Troubleshooting e Hardware Connectivity Software Configuration e Anything associated with the network devices you are working with End 260 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Overview The NVR has an embedded Linux based operating system SUSE which is used during the setup and installation process for the initial configuration of the NVR s network settings The NVR desktop can be used to re enable network access should the NVR become unaccessible when enabling disabling NICs using the NVR Web Interface The NVR desktop can also be used to edit system settings or configure storage partitions Alternatively a Remote Desktop Connection can also be established allowing you to edit the network settings using the NVR desktop from a remote
277. s when staff are not normally available For further information on the scheduler and recording modes refer to Camera Scheduler on page 123 Use staff to help identify regions of interest to monitor based on their observations for example of missing merchandise or missing fixtures Video Intelligence alarms can therefore be configured to monitor areas of potential activity Use searches frequently and watch activity leading up to an alarm being triggered This may give an indication of suspicious activity and other areas to monitor Tune your alarms regularly to ensure the alarms reflect changes to the environment for example objects being rearranged or replaced Monitoring these changes and re tuning your alarms will ensure maximum effectiveness of the Video Intelligence alarms and searches Use the new information that Video Intelligence provides to learn and adapt Use it to implement changes that will improve surveillance and reduce losses for example eliminate blind spots make staff aware of suspicious behavior or re design the environment and alarms Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Video Intelligence Enable Video Intelligence for a Camera To enable a camera to use Video Intelligence features you can use the Camera List Page or the Function and Stream settings section of the camera Advanced Edit page Figure 10 1 Function and Stream Settings Record Status MORE INFO Generate Meta
278. scovery Configure Alarms Storage Configure Email alerts Configure Finish Summary Figure 3 10 Setup Page License License Type Temporary No of Cameras 128 No of Analytic Cameras 8 Time Remaining 59 Days 23 Hours 53 Minutes 0 Seconds Select your permanent license below License File Browse EAJ SASE Upgrades To upgrade your license please contact your American Dynamics sales associate quoting your NVR Host ID available below Generate Host ID Upload a template file Optional Importing a template file will result in this wizard using preconfigured values If you do not have a template file the wizard will guide you through the rest of the NVR setup process Select a template file to import Template File Browse EUJAGUSEG Procedure 3 14 Configuring the Setup Page Step Action 1 Apply your saved licence file a Click Browse in the License section For convenience there is an icon on the desktop with direct access to the American Dynamics net web site to register your license In most instances the license will be emailed to you in less than one minute b Locate your permanent license file and click Open c Select Apply Permanent License Or Request a licence by generating a Host ID a Click Generate Host ID Note Your NVR host ID should be quoted to American Dynamics if you wish to apply for your license For more information refer to Procedure 14 1 Generate
279. se of Pan Tilt Zoom PTZ and other controls The Audit Trail page provides information on changes which have been made by a privileged user including system date time software upgrade FTP log management user login passwords and network settings Dark Image Detection Use to determine if a camera on the NVR is recording a very dark or potentially black video Once configured the test will run for each camera on the server once every minute Email Alerts Use the Email Alerts page to add email addresses to receive a number of predefined alerts The Alert Logs page displays a log of email alerts which have been transmitted from the NVR Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Using the NVR Interface Connected Clients Use to display the IP Address of the device viewing the NVR via a client for example victor unified client or QuickTime An entry for each camera being viewed from the NVR is displayed with the corresponding IP Address client type and streaming protocol Reset to Factory Defaults Use to reset the following of the NVR s settings Storage Failover User Passwords and Alarm settings Saved Media files video audio can be erased retained or retained and re indexed Carrying out a Reset to Factory Defaults will have no affect on the NVR s Linux based operating system Shutdown Use to Restart NVR Services Reboot the NVR and to Shutdown the NVR Procedure 4 3 Navigating the NVR Interface Step Acti
280. ser Security and Users Software c LDAP Client LDAP Server System Other Mail Server lt Network Services xinetd a NFS Client feb NES Server NTP Configuration Proxy Remote Administration R D Remote Administration V N i Samba Server s SSHD Configuration 4B TFTP Server B Windows Domain Member Security and Users 3 Click Remote Administration VNC Refer to Figure 25 3 Control Center The Remote Administration window opens 5 American Dynamics 263 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Figure 25 4 Remote Administration Remote Administration YaST Remote Administration if this feature is enabled you can administer this machine remotely from another machine more Remote Administration Settings Allow Remote Administration Do Not Allow Remote Administration Firewall Settings Firewall is disabled bor Back Finish 4 Select Allow Remote Administration Refer to Figure 25 4 Remote Administration 5 Click Finish End Accessing the Remote Desktop RDP Remote Desktop The following procedures will allow you to log on and log off RDP remote desktop Procedure 25 3 Logging in to RDP Remote Desktop Step Action 1 Click Start in the Windows taskbar 2 Select All Programs 3 Select Accessories 4 Select Remote Desktop Connection The Remote Desktop Connection application opens 264 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and Us
281. size and click Set Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix B Web Client Pre configuration Figure 23 2 Selecting System Managed Size Virtual Memory Drive Volume Label Paging File Size MB 2046 4092 C D Storage Drive C Space available 21230 MB Custom size Initial size MB 2046 Maximum size MB 4092 O System managed size O No paging file Total paging file size for all drives Minimum allowed 2MB Recommended 3837 MB Currently allocated 2046 MB cancel 8 Click OK If the System prompts you to reboot the PC follow the reboot prompts End Procedure 23 2 Configuring the Paging File Windows 7 Step Action Click Start in the Windows taskbar Right click My Computer and select System Properties Select Advanced System Settings kh OO N On the Advanced tab in the Performance section click Settings You must be logged on as an Administrator to make most of these changes Visual effects processor scheduling memory usage and virtual memory User Profiles Desktop settings related to your logon Startup and Recovery System startup system failure and debugging information 5 Select the Advanced tab 5 American Dynamics 239 Appendix B Web Client Pre configuration 6 In the Virtual Memory section click Change Performance Options Visual Effects Advanced Data Execution Prevention i Proces
282. sor scheduling R Choose how to allocate processor resources Adjust for best performance of Programs Background services Virtual memory A paging file is an area on the hard disk that Windows uses as ifit were RAM Total paging file size for all drives 2013 MB 7 Optional Deselect Automatically manage paging file size for all drives The Paging file size for selected drive settings become available to edit 8 In the Paging file size for selected drive section select System Managed Size and click Set Virtual Memory Automatically manage paging file size for all drives Paging file size for each drive Drive Volume Label Paging File Size MB Selected drive C OSDisk Space available 160436 MB Custom size System managed size No paging file Total paging file size for all drives Minimum allowed 16 MB Recommended 3019 MB Currently allocated 2013 M8 Cox _ cane 9 Click OK If the System prompts you to reboot the PC follow the reboot prompts End Setting QuickTime Preferences After you install QuickTime on the PC that you will use to access the NVR Web Interface you need to adjust QuickTime Preferences if you wish to view video in a QuickTime pop out window The 240 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix B Web Client Pre configuration sections below outline how to set the preferences depending on whether you are using the Windows
283. spsrc c 4041 gst_rtspsrc_send GstPipeline video pipeline GstBin srcbin GstRT SPSre source ot error response 401 Unauthorized src source src_type GstRTSPSre Tue Jul 10 13 32 18 2012 Pee aRR PCR Ck Tae Reet aetna Tri keen essen lr ginny resource debug gstrtspsrc c 5356 gst_rtspsrc_pause GstPipeline video pipeline GstBin srcbin GstRT SP Src source s ould not send message src source src_type GstRTSPSrc Network Failover Storage Statistics Logs Tue Jul 10 14 38 53 2012 TETA TE Tue Jul 10 14 38 53 2012 METEL TAE E eee eee ee TET resource debug gstrtspsrc c 4041 gst_rtspsrc_send GstPipeline video pipeline GstBin srcbin GstRTSPSrc source Email Alerts ot error response 401 Unauthorized src source src_type GstRTSPSrc PTZ Serial Ports Dark image Detection Connected Clients Reset to Factory Defaults Shutdown Tue Jul 10 14 39 13 2012 Monitor Output Te Tue Jul 10 14 39 13 2012 MoET Monitor Output Tours resource debug gstrtspsrc c 4041 gst_rtspsrc_send GstPipeline video pipeline GstBin srcbin GstRT SP Src source Monitor Output Presets resource debug gstrtspsrc c 5356 gst_rtspsrc_pause GstPipeline video pipeline GstBin srcbin GstRT SPSrc source Hybrid ould not send message src source src_type GstRTSPSrc A Tyco Intemational Company Procedure 19 4 Viewing Camera Connection Errors Step Action Select Advanced 2 Select Logs Se
284. ssage opens Click Yes to use the password and continue or click No to change the password A secure password should contain both upper and lower case letters numbers and special characters 2 Ifthe passwords entered into the Password and Confirm Password fields do not match a message opens Re enter the passwords to continue Or If you do not want to create an operator user account a Leave the User s Full Name Username Password and Confirm Password fields empty b Click Next A message opens stating Empty User Login and asking for confirmation to Leave it empty c Click Yes Note It is highly recommended to setup an operator account when prompted in addition to the root user account The root user account should be used for troubleshooting and system OS setup only 6 To continue with the installation and configuration process you need to log in to the NVR desktop End 5 American Dynamics 23 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Log into the NVR Desktop After setting up user accounts to continue the installation and configuration process you need to log into the NVR desktop Figure 3 7 NVR Login Screen e SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 11 x86_64 techcomms adnvr Username Disconnect cancel Log In Procedure 3 12 Logging into the NVR Desktop Step Action When the system boots to the NVR login screen Enter your operator Username Click Log In Enter your P
285. store tab Click Browse Navigate to the backup file you want to use select the file and click Open A message box opens asking you if you want to recover any media that is part of storage being restored Click Yes if you want to recover media otherwise click No 7 A recovery progression bar opens and updates as the recovery progresses If you are recovering media this may take a some time A message box opens informing you that the recovery is complete Click OK 10 Configure your network settings using the file VideoOSDetails xxxxxxxx created as part of your backup file Use this file as reference to configure 5 American Dynamics 183 NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates Domain Name e Domain Name Servers e Default Gateway RTSP Port NTP Status e NTP Servers e Network Interfaces e DHCP Configuration Note If you are restoring DHCP and or NTP settings you need to restart your DHCP and or NTP server End Templates With the NVR you can save a server s configuration data to a template You can import the template to another NVR and the configuration settings of the NVR will be configured according to the settings on the imported template You can store a template file on a USB or local disk 184 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates Figure 17 4 Template Settings American Dynamics
286. t RTSP Streaming Port for your NVR to conform to your network rules you can use the RTSP Streaming Port field on the General Settings page to change the port setting Procedure 15 3 Editing the RTSP Port Step Action 1 Select Network 2 Select General The General Network settings page opens Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Network Settings 3 To edit the RTSP Port select the current value Update the RTSP Port as required The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 Click Save A confirmation message displays Note The default RSTP Port number is 554 End NTP Status and NTP Servers The NVR can be used as a Network Time Protocol NTP Server to all reachable network devices In this configuration it will accept and respond to NTP requests from all accessible networks Note Setting the NVR to use NTP can affect the time and date settings of cameras and other devices with access to the same networks as the server if you configure these devices to use the NVR as an NTP server The NTP server will not affect other Windows devices on the LAN with the NVR Alternatively you can use external NTP servers to synchronize date and time instead of using the NVR as the NTP Server Note You should setup all NVRs and client systems to use the same NTP Server to synchronize date and time settings Procedure 15 4 Editing the NTP Status to use NVR as a NTP Server Step Actio
287. t can be seen in the region of interest but does not pass through it Note If these types are not available in the dropdown list you do not have Video Intelligence enabled on the camera instead Motion Detection is enabled Enable Video Intelligence to continue Procedure 10 1 Enabling Video Intelligence for a Camera on page 115 8 Optional Use the drawing tools to draw the Video Intelligence region of interest in the Camera Alarm Configuration drawing window refer to Table 9 2 Drawing Tools on page 107 for information Note If you do not draw a region of interest the entire camera view will be used as the region of interest 9 Enable the alarm by selecting the Yes option button for the Enabled field 10 Complete the alarm configuration fields Depending on the Video Intelligence type selected there will be different alarm parameters to configure Object Detection 5 American Dynamics 119 Video Intelligence 11 a Overlap The amount of a detected object that must be in the region of interest before an alarm is triggered Use a higher setting to detect objects that are mostly inside the region and use a lower value to find objects that just brush the edge of the region Abandoned Removed a Overlap The amount of background change that must be in the region of interest before an alarm is triggered Use a higher setting to avoid finding nearby changes or changes that are not completely in the region of inte
288. t to Factory Defaults Shutdown Monitor Output Tours Monitor Output Presets Hybrid A Tyco Intemational Company Procedure 19 7 Viewing Connected Clients Step Action Select Advanced 2 Select Connected Clients The Connected Clients page opens End 5 American Dynamics 207 Logs 208 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Overview Email Alerts The Email Alerts page consists of the Email Alerts page and the Alert Logs page Email Alerts can be setup in the NVR to send notifications to selected email addresses regarding several different categories see Table 20 1 The Alert Logs page is used to display all of the email alerts that have been transmitted Table 20 1 Alert Categories Alert Category Description System Alerts All general system alerts not included in the other categories Storage Alerts Transmitted when storage is not healthy Motion Detection Alerts Generated by motion detection Does not include image attachments Analytics Alerts Generated by Video Intelligence Alerts Camera Malfunction Sent when a camera refuses to respond Reboot Notification Sent when the system is rebooted Camera s Not Recording Generated when recording does not occur on one or more cameras No Storage Active on Unit Generated when no storage can be activated Failed to Read Storage Config Sent when storage configuration error
289. t you when the license is close to expiry You can add edit contact email addresses to receive the SSA expiry message and edit the SMTP Server You can also send a test email message to confirm the settings entered are correct Note To be able to use SSA notifications you must ensure that your NVR is configured with a valid Domain Name and Default Gateway For further information refer to General Network Settings on page 149 Edit the SSA Message You can edit the SSA message that is sent to you when the NVR licence is close to expiry 5 American Dynamics 143 Licensing the NVR Procedure 14 3 Edit the SSA Message Step Action 1 Select System from the main menu 2 Select Licensing The Licensing page opens Figure 14 1 3 In the Software Service Agreement section click Change Message The SSA Expire Message editing window opens To edit the message subject enter the desired text in the Subject field To edit the message body enter the desired text in the Message field Click Submit End Edit SSA Contacts The SSA contacts are those who will receive the SSA message to alert them when the NVR licence is about to expire To receive the message you must add at least one contact s email address to the contacts list You can add and remove contacts to from the contact list when required Procedure 14 4 Edit SSA Contacts Step Action 144 Select System from the main menu Select Licensing The Licensing page op
290. tage of the installation process Note If you forget to remove the software CD or USB from the computer server you will be given the option to select Boot from Hard Disk Procedure 3 10 Rebooting the NVR After Basic Installation Step Action 1 After basic installation is complete a Finished Basic Installation dialog appears Click OK A American Dynamics 21 Installing the VideoEdge NVR The Live Installer closes and the Terminal Window opens 2 Use the keyboard to enter Y followed by the Enter in the Terminal Window Ensure the BIOS splash screen is displayed Remove the disk or detach the USB drive The NVR reboots and the installation options menu opens AN caution It is not recommended to remove the disk or USB before the BIOS splash screen is displayed 4 Optional If you do not remove the disk USB use the keyboard to select Boot from Hard Disk and press the Enter 5 After the system has booted the licence agreement is displayed select Yes Agree to the Licence Agreement to continue with the VideoEdge software installation 6 Click Next The Password for the Root User account page displays The next stage of installation process is to create user accounts End Set Up NVR OS User Accounts The next stage of the installation and configuration process is to set a password for the root user account You also must create an operator user account and password These accounts will be used for logging i
291. tance a warning message opens informing you that multiple cameras will be updated End Change a Camera s Storage Set Changing the storage set a camera is assigned to is only applicable if you have configured the NVR for advanced storage When you change the storage set media from the camera will now be stored on media folders in the new storage set You can also edit the storage set a camera is assigned to by editing the advanced storage settings refer to Advanced Camera Configuration on page 89 Procedure 8 5 Changing a Camera s Storage Set Step Action 1 Select Cameras from the main menu 2 Select List 5 American Dynamics 91 Camera Configuration 92 3 Click the Setup button in the camera record that you want to assign to a new storage set The Function amp Streams page opens 4 Select the General tab Select the new storage set from the Storage Set dropdown list Click Apply End Configure Camera Image Settings Use the Image Settings options to adjust the camera image settings The settings available are dependant on the camera make model When the changed settings are applied the viewer window updates to reflect the changes made The settings in Figure 8 7 are an example of camera image settings Figure 8 7 Image Settings axis 00408c7f4ce7 Axis 210 Live camera view Video Properties Brightness Contrast Hue Rotate Image EXE Cancel Procedure 8 6 Configuring Came
292. tep Action 1 Select Advanced from the main menu 2 Select Storage Statistics The Rec Performance page opens 3 Select the Rec Statistics tab The Recording Statistics page opens Figure 18 2 4 Details of these statistics are outlined in the Recording Statistics table Table 18 1 or the 192 Total Recording Statistics table Table 18 2 End Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Operational Statistics Disk Activity The Disk Activity page contains a graph outlining the disk activity for a specified media folder over a specified period of time The graph can be customized by selecting the required filters There are three values the graph depicts The Average Utilization red the Average Read green and the Average Write blue over the time period selected Figure 18 3 Disk Activity Statistics Page Filters Disk Activity Disk Activity Media Folder System Disk Sampling Rate 1 minute e Report for last All hours Utilization Scale 1000 Disk VO Scale 1000 1 Avg Utilization Avg Read MBps Avg Hrite MBps a 3 2 N a a 3 2 5 rd 2 Avg Disk I 0 10090 KB secs 3 3 Tine nonth day hhinn gt Avg Utilization The axis values Average Disk I O The are dependent on the filters Time The axis values axis axis scale is dependant selected are dependent on the filters on the filters selected select
293. ter Basic Installation on page 21 End Editing Media Partition Configurations If you have completed the installation of the NVR hardware and software bundle default media partitions will be configured on the NVR You can change these media partitions to suit your specific requirements 5 American Dynamics 273 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting 274 If you want to edit media partition configurations on a storage device you must remove all media folders already configured to be used by the NVR from the NVR configuration Refer to Disabling Storage Media Folders on page 62 for information Note If a storage set contains only media folders from the device you want to edit media partition configurations on you must move camera recording to other storage sets first Refer to Advanced Storage Configuration on page 65 for further information NVR Services should also be stopped prior to changing partition configurations on devices that have already been added to the NVR Refer to Procedure 16 2 Stop NVR Services on page 170 for further information Procedure 25 9 Editing Media Partitions Step Action Select Computer from the NVR desktop 2 Select YaST from the System menu The Control Center opens Select Partitioner from the System menu A warning message opens Click Yes to continue The Expert Partitioner page opens Select the disk containing the media partitions you want to edit from the system view tree To edit the size
294. ternative Hard Disk USB and 2nd Boot Device is the hard drive 7 Select Save and Exit Setup to reboot the system with the above settings End Boot your Computer Server Using the NVR Software CD or USB To initialize the installation of the NVR the system must boot from the software CD or USB Procedure 3 5 Boot your Computer Server Using the NVR Software CD or USB Step Action 1 Insert the NVR software CD into the optical drive or insert the NVR Installation USB drive into one of the available USB ports and restart your computer server 5 American Dynamics 11 Installing the VideoEdge NVR The NVR boots from the CD or USB drive and the installation options menu opens Note If the NVR does not boot from the disk please review your computer server BIOS option to boot from optical drive or USB Please check your computer server function key to enter boot order Procedure 3 4 Verify BIOS Configuration on page 11 From the installations option menu select NVR Live Installer Note After approximately 20 seconds the installation will automatically start in this mode A Loading Linux Kernel pop up displays followed by a series of boot messages This process may take several minutes When the system has finished the initial software installation and restart the NVR desktop opens Note The VideoEdge NVR software will install the minimum required Linux Operating System to run the NVR The NVR software is install
295. the camera to the NVR Rec Displays the camera recording state There are four available options to select Recording Off Recording Always If the scheduler is enabled you cannot change the camera recording state and the icon is displayed in the field O Recording Normal Off Alarm On Recording Always With Alarm On Analytics Indicates if analytics are set on the camera There are three analytic options Analytics Off Motion Detection Video Intelligence This encompasses object detection direction linger enter exit and abandoned removed Audio Indicates if audio is enabled or disabled on the camera The indicator is green when audio is enabled Stream 1 Stream 2 Live Indicates that this stream will be used for live streaming Alarm Indicates that this stream will be used for any alarms that are recorded Rec Indicates that this stream will be used for non alarm recording Analytics Indicates that this stream will be used for executing analytics motion detection or video intelligence Note If an alarm is raised for motion detection or video intelligence the alarm stream is used to record the alarm Codec The camera codec FPS The camera FPS Resolution The camera resolution 78 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual
296. the NVR Server Web Interface Step Action 1 Launch your web browser and enter the NVR IP address into the URL field A American Dynamics 51 Using the NVR Interface Enter http NVR_Server_IP_Address where NVR_Server_IP_Address is the IP address of the machine running the NVR software for example http 192 187 100 21 2 The NVR login dialog box opens Enter your User name and Password User name admin Default Password VIDEO edge23 Or User name operator Default Password VideoEdge Note 1 You are asked to login authenticate when you e First log on to the NVR Web Server e Are already logged on and your user access is changed 2 Ifyou have changed the account passwords use these in place of the default password Figure 4 1 NVR Login Dialog Windows Security N The server 192 168 188 41 at Administrative Access requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name F Password Remember my credentials Cancel 3 Click OK The web page interface for the NVR opens Figure 4 3 End victor NVR Configuration Interface To access the victor NVR configuration interface you must have the NVR added as a recorder in the device list on your victor client For information on how to add the NVR recorder to victor refer to the victor
297. the NVR backup information VideoConfBackup xxxxxxxxxxx The other is a text file detailing Network and storage mount information VideoOSDetails xxxxxxxx End Restore an NVR System backup files contain NVR configuration information The type of information contained in a particular file is dependent on the settings selected when the file was being created When the backup file is applied the NVR is restored as per the saved configurations Note 1 Only a licenced server can be restored 2 You cannot restore from a previously saved VideoEdge NVR 4 1 backup configuration file 182 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates Figure 17 3 Restore Window ABOUT American Dynamics n 421758 A Tyco International Ce Live Video Cameras Storage System General Roles Licensing Templates Backup Restore Update Software PTZ Serial Protocols Network Advanced Hybrid Procedure 17 4 mpany Restore Restore Backup Configuration Upload a backup configuration file to restore NVR system settings NOTE If restoring DHCP and or NTP settings you must ensure that your DHCP and or NTP server is restarted as needed Backup File Upload Backup A Tyco Intemational Company Restoring an NVR from a Backup File Step Action Select System from the main menu 2 Select Backup Restore The Backup page opens Select the Re
298. time stamp changes constantly and could register as motion Try not to point cameras into sunlight because high brightness will prevent detection of movement of bright objects such as a person with a white shirt Avoid areas with persistent motion such as trees blinking lights or spinning signs by using an appropriate region of interest Do not use motion detection on moving cameras such as PTZ cameras cameras that vibrate due to wind or other effects or cameras mounted on moveable fixtures Enabling Motion Detection 104 To enable a camera to use Motion Detection features you can use the Camera List page Refer to Procedure 8 1 Editing Basic Camera Settings via the Camera List on page 85 or the Function and Stream settings section of the camera Advanced Edit page Figure 9 1 Function and Stream Settings Record Status 2 Generate Meta Data None gt Motion Sensitivity Recording Retention Period 0 Days 0 Hours Audio Settings Enabled E Stream Configuration MORE INFO Stream 1 Stream 2 Live Alarm Record Analytics Live Record Analytics 25 m D1 RESOLUTION RESOLUTION VBR m 4000 Base BIT RATE CONTROL MAX BIT RATE PROFILE 70 x HJA Cancel A Stream Configuration is required that allows the NVR to generate meta data for motion detection You also need to select Motion Detection in the Generate Meta
299. tional media storage partitions 17 Once the required number of media partitions are created click Accept A summary of the partitions to be created are displayed If you want to edit any of the partitions click Edit Partition Setup and make the changes as required 18 Click Next A summary of the partition layout to be created is displayed 19 Click Install The Live Installation Settings page is displayed 20 Continue to Verify the Boot Loader location End Verify the Boot Loader location The boot loader must be on the same disk where the operating system software will be installed If the boot loader is not on the same disk the system software is located system boot problems may occur Before confirming installation you can compare the location of the boot loader and the location chosen for system installation and partitioning In Figure 3 3 Live Installation Settings below the installer has chosen to use the disk dev sdb for the partitioning proposal but the disk on which to install the boot loader is dev sda 5 American Dynamics 17 Installing the VideoEdge NVR 18 Figure 3 3 Live Installation Settings Live Installation Settings Click any headline to make changes or use the Change menu below System System innotek GmbH VirtualBox 1 2 Processor Intel R Core TM 2 Duo CPU E8400 3 00GHz Mam Memory 1 GB Partitioning Delete partition dev sdb1 14 91 GB Delete partition dev sdb2 1
300. tored in the backup file Note Operating System settings can not be stored in the configuration backup file However the system will also automatically export a text file containing the OS settings which can be used as reference for manually configuring the OS settings Procedure 17 3 Creating a Configuration Backup File Step Action Select System from the main menu 2 Select Backup Restore The Backup page opens 3 Select the required checkboxes for the configuration settings that you want saved to the template in the Templates section Figure 17 2 a All b Camera Settings c System Settings d User Information e DHCP Settings f NTP Settings 5 American Dynamics 181 NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates 4 Click Backup Select Save As Navigate to the folder where you want to save the backup file Note To use the backup file during a system recovery procedure you must save the file to an external location for example a USB drive 7 Enter a File name for the backup file and click Save Note A default backup file name is given this is made up of VideoConfBackup followed by the NVR name and the date and time the file was created Example VideoConfBackup ServerName yYYYY mMM dDD h00 m00 s00_files zip VideoConfBackup ServerName y2012 m03 d26 h14 m02 s43_files zip This file should be extracted and saved to a safe location not on the NVR The zip file contains two files one of the files is
301. transferred to your 4 2 1 NVR and assigned to the same storage set In the storage configuration pages all media folders apart from one will have the same name as was used in the 4 1 partition appended by the number 1 For example 4 1 partitions sdh and sdj will be named sdh1 and sdj1 on your NVR 4 2 1 One partition from your 4 1 unit is divided into 14 smaller partitions Thirteen of these partitions are available as media folders and can be used to store media One partition is reserved as the clip export partition The 13 media folders that are available for storage have the 4 1 partition name appended with numbers 1 15 excluding numbers 2 and 4 For example if the partition was named in the 4 1 NVR as sdg in your NVR 4 2 1 the 13 smaller partitions representing this larger partition are named sdg1 sdg3 sdg5 up to sdg15 The partitions appended by numbers 2 and 4 are not visible in the storage configuration pages as number 2 is used by the clip export partition and number 4 is utilized by the NVR as part of the partition method Figure 26 16 below shows the upgraded storage media folders Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Appendix E Upgrading your NVR 4 1 Figure 26 16 Upgraded Storage A American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Storage Sets Live Video Add Storage Set Cameras Storage Basic Default Storage Set 1 Available Space 24762 46 GB TOTAL AMOUNT TO USE gt Advanced DEV
302. troller 5891 ERROR device CreateVideoStream caught a CError error Camera input 7 is disconn ug 21 16 00 50 err device_controller 5891 ERROR video 5 5 H264 0 createStream returned error Camera input 6 is disconnect Aug 21 16 00 50 err device_controller S891 ERROR device CreateVideoStream caught a CError error Camera input 6 is disconn ug 21 16 00 50 err device_controller 5891 ERROR video 0 0 MJPEG 0 createStream returned error Camera input 1 is disconne ug 21 16 00 50 err device_controller S891 ERROR device CreateVideoStream caught a CError error Camera input 1 is disconn aug 21 16 00 50 err device_controller S891 ERROR video 0 0 H264 0 createStream returned error Camera input 1 is disconnect ug 21 16 00 50 err device_controller 5891 ERROR device CreateVideoStream caught a CError error Camera input 1 is disconn ug 21 16 00 49 err device_controller S891 ERROR video 7 7 H264 0 createStream returned error Camera input 8 is disconnect Aug 21 16 00 49 err device_controller S891 ERROR device CreateVideoStream caught a CError error Camera input 8 is disconn Jaug 21 16 00 49 err device_controller 5891 ERROR video 6 6 H264 0 createStream returned error Camera input 7 is disconnect laug 21 16 00 49 err device_controller 5891 ERROR device CreateVideoStream caught a CError error Camera input 7 is disconn aug 21 16 00 49 err device_co
303. u 2 Select List Click Setup in the camera record for which you want to configure camera settings The Function amp Streams page opens Note You can also enable Motion Detection from the Camera List refer to Procedure 8 1 Editing Basic Camera Settings via the Camera List on page 85 4 Set the camera Record Status to a setting that supports Motion Detection Recording Normal Off Alarm On or Recording Always with Alarm On 5 Select Motion Detection from the Generate Meta Data dropdown list Note If an error message opens the NVR cannot detect a suitable stream from the camera to support Motion Detection You will need to change the Codec Image Resolution or FPS of one of your camera s streams to settings that are compatible with Motion Detection see Table 9 1 6 Select the required level of Motion Sensitivity Values range from High most results to Low least results 7 Click Apply 8 To create a Motion Detection alarm refer to Procedure 9 3 Creating a Motion Detection Camera Alarm on page 108 End 5 American Dynamics 105 Motion Detection Disabling Motion Detection When required you can disable Motion Detection in the Camera List or using the camera s Advanced Edit page When Motion Detection is disabled you will not be able to perform some of the Motion Detection based activities such as setting NVR Motion Detection alarms Procedure 9 2 Disabling Motion Detection fo
304. u Launches the start menu the main body of the OS to have up to four menus oper interface Menus and files will ations open at any one time open in this area Logging Out of RDP Remote Desktop When using RDP remote desktop it is important to logout correctly Failure to do so will leave a high CPU process running on the NVR which will affect performance Procedure 25 4 Logging Out of RDP Remote Desktop Step Action Click Computer 2 Select Logout A popup window opens 266 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual 3 4 Appendix D NVR Troubleshooting Figure 25 7 Logout Icon Documents System Favorite Applications Help g amp Firefox Nautilus led Web Browser File Browser T Install Remove Software Recent Applications Bs Logout GNOME Terminal iSCSI Initiator 8 Shutdown Command Line Ter configure an iSCSI i al Hostnames Emacs Assign hostnames WY Text Editor Status Network Settings vc System Monitor LS Configure network c Home 4 5G Free 7 9G Network Wired More Applications Using ethernet eth0 O Computer Select Log Out Remote Desktop window closes Figure 25 8 Logout Popup iE Log Out of the Session Log Out Ends your session and logs you out SS Suspends your session allowing another user to log in and use the computer You are currently logged in as root You will be autom
305. ugh to capture the object in one or more captured frames Video Intelligence events create entries in the victor site manager database It is important to ensure that the Video Intelligence parameters are accurate to avoid generating false log entries Exclude the Time Stamp region from the region of interest because the time stamp changes constantly and could register as movement Try not to point cameras into sunlight because high brightness will prevent detection of movement of bright objects such as a person with a white shirt Avoid areas with persistent motion such as trees blinking lights or spinning signs by using an appropriate region of interest Do not use Video Intelligence on moving cameras such as PTZ cameras cameras that vibrate due to wind or other effects or cameras mounted on moveable fixtures Choose your Video Intelligence alarms selectively You do not want to create alarms that will trigger a high number of alerts making the important alerts more difficult to identify Situate cameras to provide the best possible views of the areas of interest objects and people It is best to ensure camera views separate objects from people ensure objects and people take up a larger portion of the camera view and keep the entire region of interest within the camera s view Use the scheduler to ensure alarm recording statuses are activated at night or during non working hours This provides additional coverage during time
306. ultiple disks for increased input output performance and or better reliability Since RAID systems use multiple disks they are often referred to as disk groups Disk groups are also known as volumes or RAID arrays There are different types of RAID configurations Some of the best known configurations are RAID 0 1 5 and 1 0 Each configuration uses an approach to storage that can provide fault tolerance additional availability of data redundancy additional performance or more than one of these factors Key RAID Concepts Mirroring Duplicating data to more than one disk Striping Splitting data across more than one disk Error Correction Storing redundant data so problems can be detected and possibly fixed Common RAID Types RAID 0 Uses striping to provide extra performance and capacity but does not provide data protection lack of mirroring or parity RAID 1 Uses mirroring to provide 1 1 backup which increases read performance or reliability at the expense of capacity This configuration is often used with databases due to better transaction time and availability RAID 1 0 or 10 is a mirrored data set RAID 1 which is then striped RAID 0 hence the name 1 0 A RAID 1 0 array requires a minimum of four drives two mirrored drives to hold one half of the striped data plus another two mirrored drives to hold the other half of the data In LINUX MD RAID 10 is a non nested RAID type like RAID 1
307. urity system The NVR is available as either a bundled hardware solution or as software only model that transforms a standard computer hardware system into an advanced and powerful NVR server The NVR software is a hardware independent platform It supports major brand IP camera and encoder devices integrates into a TCP IP networking environment turning an ordinary PC or server into an Enterprise Network Video Recorder victor Digital Video Management System The open architecture of the victor Digital Video Management System line is designed so that each component can operate independently and can interact with software applications from other product lines The victor Digital Video Management System line includes products to address the needs of a wide range of users A American Dynamics 1 Overview of the VideoEdge NVR As the architecture is open it is independent of specific hardware platforms The NVR does not require an existing operating system as it includes it s own Linux based operating system that can support a variety of different hardware platforms Figure 1 1 shows how the NVR fits into the victor Network Video Management System Figure 1 1 VideoEdge Network Video Components Camera Network with Ethernet Switch iSCSI RAID Rack Mount Remote victor Clients via Internet victor Site PIG Local Web Clients Manager Bar WAN Local Area Network Backbone The NVR manages the video camera storage and sensor assets
308. urts of New York for purposes of resolving any and all disputes arising under or related to these terms and conditions The parties specifically exclude the application of the provisions of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual A Adding cameras 80 83 Alarms motion detection 106 video intelligence 117 Alert Sensors configuration 99 Audit Trail 206 B Backup configuration 181 Best Practices motion detection 103 video intelligence 114 C Camera adding to NVR 80 83 calibrating 69 configuration advanced 89 configuration basic 85 configuration batch 86 motion detection 104 password groups 91 131 recording mode 95 removing 82 storage statistics 196 video intelligence 113 Camera List 77 filtering 79 Changing system ID 136 Configuration alert sensors 99 backup 181 AS American Dynamics Index camera advanced 89 camera basic 85 camera batch 86 DHCP network settings 155 failover 179 network settings 147 paging file 237 restore 182 storage 65 storage device 60 WAN settings 157 Configuring Sensors dry contact sensors 99 Connecting FRS FES storage 228 iSCSI storage 230 D Dark Image Detection 217 Camera Loss Detection 218 Disabling failover 179 Displaying NVR camera summary 79 E Email Alerts 209 camera disable 212 enable disable 212 set up 210 F Failover 177 configuratio
309. ustom storage sets and assign cameras to specific storage sets WARNING This option is for expert users only Disable recommended Enable Procedure 3 26 Basic Settings Step Action 1 To edit the Vault Media Quota select Edit then enter the desired percentage of storage to be allocated as the Vault Media Quota in the text box Select Apply Quota To add drives to storage select the check boxes for each desired drive then click Add to Storage 4 Optional Select to the Enable Advanced Storage configuration option button Two additional steps are added to the wizard Storage Sets and Assign Cameras 44 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Installing the VideoEdge NVR Figure 3 23 Basic Page with Advanced Storage Configuration Enabled Vault Media Quota of total storage 5 USE FOR AMOUNT TO USE DEVICE MEDIA FOLDER YPE SZE GB STORAGE FOR MEDIA GB E idewisdas rastamediaz t v LAN v WAN General E evs Idata media3 E devisdas e astameaiat Bandwidth Throttling oo Advanced Storage Configuration Cameras Enabling advanced st figuration will allow you to configure custom storage sets and assign cameras to specific storage sets v Discovery WARNING This option is for expert users only Configure Disable recommended Alarms mien Options have been added to the wizard menu to support extra storage features Email alerts Configure
310. utdown and Reset Factory Defaults Procedure 16 5 Reset to Factory Defaults Step Action Select Advanced 2 Select Reset Factory Defaults The Reset Factory Defaults page opens 3 Select one of the three Reset Factory Defaults options available Reset to Factory Defaults AND Erase All Media Or Reset to Factory Defaults AND Keep Media Or Reset to Factory Defaults AND Re index Media Click Apply A warning message displays click OK to continue End 5 American Dynamics 175 System Shutdown and Reset Factory Defaults 176 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual NVR Failover Configuration Backup Templates and Updates Overview This chapter describes the functionality of the NVR Failover feature how to create configuration backup files and restore an NVR s settings from the backup file how to save a configuration template and apply the template to an NVR and how to apply software updates patches and update camera handler packs NVR Failover Mode You can configure an NVR as a Failover NVR using the Enable Failover function When in Failover mode the Failover NVR will monitor other NVR s over the network It monitors all NVR s on it s server list until one fails When a monitored NVR fails the Failover Server assumes the role of the failed NVR and NVR monitoring is suspended The Failover NVR automatically begins to record the IP connected cameras that were recording on the failed NVR Camera passwo
311. view of the VideoEdge NVR NVR Introduction The VideoEdge Network Video Management System is a scalable enterprise IP video surveillance solution It is designed as an open platform solution supporting a range of third party hardware storage video devices and clients allowing users to manage their video surveillance servers and edge devices as a single logical system The VideoEdge Network Video Recorder NVR manages the IP encoder and camera devices records the video onto its configured storage devices and provides clients with secure access to live and recorded video and audio Users can use a thin client NVR Web Interface and or the victor rich client application software to configure the NVR or access the video audio streams Purpose of the NVR The NVR is the backbone for an IP based video security system The NVR uses TCP IP communication to access and control the hardware networked to it The server can be controlled directly by logging into its web interface homepage using a web browser or accessing it via the victor rich client application software Worldwide access to the NVR gives it excellent portability any place where you have a personal computer with internet access to the web you ve got access to your video security system An NVR gives you control over all the features of the surveillance and security hardware networked to the NVR Thus from your web browser or via victor you have control over your entire video sec
312. want to remove Click Remove Group s End 5 American Dynamics 133 Camera Password Groups 134 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Basic System Settings Overview This chapter covers some of the procedures and actions which are carried out using the System Menu and its contained sub menus The System Menu provides access to the NVR s basic system settings this allows you to edit details such as its system information user roles passwords and software licensing In this chapter you will cover how to view and edit the general system settings and edit the passwords for the Admin and Operator user accounts General System Information This section details the procedures and actions that can be carried out in the System Info page This page allows you to edit the hostname i e the name assigned to the NVR the location date and time A American Dynamics 135 Basic System Settings Figure 13 1 System Info Page American Dynamics es A Tyco International Company System Info Live Video Cameras SupportID 5TXWLVWo Hostname VEHybrid 8ch Storage Location London Current Date Time 2012 08 22 10 59 General YYYY MM DD HH MM Roles Licensing Save Cancel Templates Backup Restore Update Software PTZ Serial Protocols Network Advanced Hybrid A Tyco International Company Hostname The Hostname of the NVR can be changed This provides you
313. wces Help nl Yast Boot Loader Device Map Disk Order Disks idevisda E ee p add S velete Hep Back Qanra o E Computer Germinal Terminal Es YaST m a apm s 14 3 08 PM Bg BOP JOO Arwe Select the disk that has the operating system installed from the Disk Order list In the example shown this is dev sdb Click Up to move the selected disk to a higher position in the Disk Order list Continue to click Up until the operating system disk is at the top of the list Click OK The Boot Loader settings page is displayed as shown in Figure 3 5 below A American Dynamics 19 Installing the VideoEdge NVR Figure 3 5 Boot Loader Settings Boot Loader Settings Section Management Boot Loader installation Type Boot Loader GRUB Boot Loader Options Boot Loader Location O Boot from Boot Partition Boot from Extended Partition F Boot from Master Boot Record O Boot from Root Partition D Cystom Boot Partition jdevjsdbl Boot Loader installation Details Other v e Help k Qaro Cancel 1 Ax E Computer B Terminal a Terminal ll a va a nma Fri Sep 14 3 09 PM E BOGRBIO A Bato Ensure the Custom Boot Partition checkbox is unchecked 9 Click OK to return to the Live Installation Settings page 10 Confirm on the Live Installation Settings page that the GRUB boot loader and the operating system are now configured on the same drive In the example shown in Figure 3 6 below t
314. website can be accessed via the VideoEdge Licensing Activation Icon on the NVR Desktop or by going to the following address http www americandynamics net SoftwareRegistration AutoRegistration VideoEdgeAutoRegistra tionForm aspx Note Before you generate the NVR Host ID you must ensure that all NIC s intended to be used with the NVR for example a Client LAN Camera LANs or a Storage LANs are already installed on the server Procedure 14 1 Generate a Host ID Step Action 1 Select System from the main menu 2 Select Licensing The Licensing page opens Figure 14 1 Video Edge NVR 4 2 1 Installation and User Manual Licensing the NVR 3 Click Generate Host ID in the Upgrades section A file download window opens 4 Click Open to view the Host ID Alternatively you can click Save to save the Host ID to your chosen location End Apply a Software Licence After you have received your software licence from the American Dynamics website you can apply your permanent licence Procedure 14 2 Applying a License Step Action Select System 2 Select Licensing The Licensing page opens Figure 14 1 In the Apply License section click Browse 4 Locate the license file and click Open The filepath is displayed in the License File field 5 Click Apply Permanent License End Software Service Agreement Notifications The Software Service Agreement SSA page allows you to configure a message to aler
315. wing you to define the direction of motion required to activate an alarm e Size expressed as the minimum percentage of the region of interest with activity required before activating an alarm Motion Detection provides useful information only if recording is enabled on the camera Your camera recording status should be set to either Recording Normal Off Alarm On or Recording Always with Alarm On For further information on camera recording modes refer to Procedure 8 7 Setting the Camera Recording Status on page 95 Motion Detection events will create entries in the victor site manager database If required you can use the Reports feature in victor unified client to retrieve event information Motion Detection Best Practices To ensure you get the highest quality results when using Motion Detection on the NVR it is recommended that you adhere to the following An object exhibiting motion needs to be at least 8x8 pixels in size to be detected The color of the object in grayscale should be approximately 10 15 different than the background The frame rate of the video should be high enough to capture the object in one or more captured frames Motion Detection events create entries in the victor site manager database It is important to ensure that the motion detection parameters are accurate to avoid generating false entries A American Dynamics 103 Motion Detection Exclude the Time Stamp region from motion detection because the
316. y You can define camera recording modes and set camera recording times per scheduler group You can enable or disable the camera scheduler when necessary There are three pages within the Scheduler menu the Schedules page the Scheduler Editor page and the Group Editor page A schedule is a collection of cameras with the same recording times The Schedules page is where you can enable the scheduler and create or remove schedules The Schedule Editor page is where you set the schedule times and recording modes for each period The Group Editor page is where you select which cameras belong to a schedule You can create multiple schedule groups where you can assign different cameras with different schedule times and record modes Create a Recording Schedule To create a recording schedule you need to 1 Set up your scheduler group s A American Dynamics 123 Camera Scheduler Figure 11 1 Schedules Page American Dynamics A Tyco International Company Schedules Schedule Editor Note Enabling the scheduler will prevent manual changes to the recording status of individual cameras on the camera list or advanced edit pages Scheduling Status Enabled Disabled Create Schedule Cameras Camera Count A Tyco Intemational Company 2 Set the schedule times and recording modes for the schedule group s Figure 11 2 Schedule Editor Page ay American Dynamics A Tyco International Company
317. y NVR1 might be contactable as http 70 30 22 81 80 while NVR2 is contactable as http 70 30 22 81 10080 The firewall is configured to accept NVR2 requests at http 70 30 22 81 10080 and forward them to http lt NVR2 private IP gt 80 This field must be set in scenarios where multiple NVRs are situated behind the same NAT firewall In this example this field on NVR2 must be set to 10080 Procedure 15 12 Editing the HTTP Port Step Action 1 Select Network 2 Select WAN Settings The WAN settings page opens 3 To edit the HTTP Port select the current value Update the HTTP Port as required The field background changes to yellow indicating a change has been made 4 Click Save 5 American Dynamics 159 Network Settings A confirmation message displays Note The default HTTP Port value is 80 End Secure HTTP Port This is the port number used to identify this NVR if more than one NVR is behind the NAT firewall and a secure connection https is being made If an HTTPS address is being used to access an NVR a port number can be specified for example https 70 30 22 81 443 Port 443 is normally assumed by default However if two NVRs are behind the same NAT firewall they are both exposed as the same public address so the only way to distinguish between them is by port forwarding rules at the firewall level This means that both NVRs will still listen on port 443 for HTTPS requests but that publicly NVR1 might b

NVR 4.2.1 Installation and User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents